Opgw Tech

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.
Volume II - Technical Specifications for Communication System Package under

Establishment of Fibre Optic Communication System in lieu of existing ULDC Microwave links in North Eastern Region
Volume II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
Section 1: Introduction, General Information & General Requirement
Section 2: OPGW cabling and associated hardware & fittings
Section 3: Network Configuration and Equipment Characteristics
Section 4: DC Power Supply System
Section 5: Environment, EMI, Power Supply, Cabling and Earthing
Section 6: Inspection, Test and Availability
Section 7: Training and Support Services
Section 8: Documentation and Deliverables
Section 9: Project Management, Schedule and Implementation plan
Appendix A: General Information
Appendix B:
Bill of Quantity (BOQ)
Appendix C:
Data Requirement Sheets
Index

Section-01
Introduction & General Information
Index
1.1
Project Overview ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1.2
Existing Communication System ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
1.3
Proposed Communication System -------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
1.4
Scope---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
1.4.1
Integration with Existing Communication Equipment --------------------------------------- 6
1.4.2
Details of Existing Equipment --------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
1.4.3 Synchronization of the Communication Network ----------------------------------------------- 6

1.4.4
General Technical Requirements (for Communication Equipment) ----------------------- 7
1.4.5
General Requirements --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
1.5
Systems to be supported --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
1.5.1 EMS/SCADA System

1.6
General Responsibilities and Obligations ----------------------------------------------------------- 8
1.6.1
Responsibilities for the Implementation Plan-------------------------------------------------- 9
1.6.2
Contractor Responsibilities and Obligations -------------------------------------------------- 9
1.6.3
The Employer Responsibilities and Obligations -------------------------------------------- 12
1.7
General Bidding Requirements ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
1.8
Table of Compliance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14
1.9
Organization of The Technical Specification Document --------------------------------------- 14
1.10 Applicable Standards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15

1.11 References------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
Section-01
Page 1 of 15

Section-01
INTRODUCTION and GENERAL INFORMATION
This Volume II of the Tender Document describes the technical specifications for
Communication System Package which includes overhead fibre optic cable (OPGW), associated
communication equipment & DC power supply for North Eastern Region. These systems are
being procured by the Employer (Power Grid Corporation of India Limited) as part of the
Establishment of Fibre Optic Communication Systems in lieu of existing ULDC microwave links
in North Eastern Region of India.
The intent of this project is to implement a fibre optic cable based communication network which
will be implemented in lieu of existing microwave links as well as to provide additional capacity
for catering present & future requirements.
This Specification describes the functional and performance requirements of the system. The
purpose of this section of the specification is to provide general information about the package,
general requirements, responsibilities & obligations of contractor as well as Employer, and
general bidding requirements.
1.1 Project Overview

POWERGRID has implemented System Coordination & Control (SC&C) projects on regional
basis for providing advance EMS/SCADA and Communication System for Management of
Regional Power Grids. These projects are also known as Unified Load Despatch Communication
(ULDC) projects. These ULDC projects were commissioned progressively from July 2002 to
February 2006 in Southern, Northern, North-Eastern, Eastern & Western regions.
The wideband communication network built under North Eastern Region SC&C project consists
of Fiber Optic and Digital Microwave (MW) links. The Digital Microwave links are operating in
the 2.3 to 2.5 GHz frequency range. As per GOI guidelines, it has been decided by DoT to
allocate 2.3 to 2.4 GHz frequency band to Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) services and
therefore this frequency band is to be vacated by the POWERGRID. Accordingly, fibre optic
based communication system is to be established in lieu of existing MW system under North
Eastern Region ULDC. The fibre optic cable shall be installed on POWERGRID Transmission
Line as well as the Transmission lines of State Power Transmission Utilities in North Eastern
Region.
In view of the urgent requirement, few of the links are being installed by diverting OPGW &
associated hardware accessories from an ongoing project in Northern region on replenishment
basis. The Contractor under this package shall install the replenished OPGW & associated
hardware accessories in Northern Region as mentioned in Appendix B.
Section-01
Page 2 of 15

1.2 Existing Communication System

The existing wideband communication system for the North Eastern Region comprises of Digital
Microwave links supporting bit rate of 4 x 2 Mbps and Fibre Optic links with supporting bit rate
of STM-1. The wideband communication network is providing voice & data connectivity among
Control Centres and from RTUs to Control Centre. The Digital Microwave Radio links are
working along with PDH equipments. The subscribers are also connected to PDH equipments
and voice/data channels are working. The existing wideband communication network is given in
Appendix-A.
1.3
Proposed Communication System
The proposed communication system shall be fibre optic based and shall consist of overhead and
underground fibre optic links with a minimum bit rate of Synchronous Transport Module-4
(STM-4). The scope of the telecommunication system procurement for the Project includes
design, supply, installation, testing and implementation of a fully integrated wideband
telecommunications network consisting of overhead fibre optic systems.
Communication Network diagram proposed in support of Establishment of Fibre Optic
Communication System in lieu of existing ULDC Microwave links in North Eastern Region is
given in Appendix-A.
The Contractor shall provide fibre optic links in lieu of existing Microwave Radio links. The
switchover of the traffic from Microwave Radio equipment to fibre optic equipment shall be
planned to avoid downtime.
1.4
Scope & General Requirements
The scope of this package is described in following parts:

Part-I Fibre Optic Cable
The broad scope of the procurement of this part include the survey, planning, design,
engineering, manufacturing, supply, transportation, insurance, delivery at site, unloading,
handling, storage, installation, splicing, termination, testing, training, and demonstration for
acceptance, commissioning and documentation for:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
OPGW fibre optic cable including all associated hardware , accessories & fittings
Fibre Optic approach cable including installation material
Fibre Optic Distribution Panels (FODP) & Joint Box
Supply of spares and test equipment
All other associated work/items described in the technical specifications.
Most of the OPGW fibre optic cables under this project shall be installed under live line
conditions, i.e. with all the circuits of the transmission line charged to their rated voltage.
However, some of OPGW cables may be installed in off-line conditions. The tentative bill of
quantities for both live-line as well as off-line OPGW cable system installations have been
Section-01
Page 3 of 15

specified in the appendices and the actual quantities for both types shall be finalised during
project execution after detailed survey.
The Contractor has to carry out the detailed survey and collect the required data for preparation
of drum schedule. For Fibre Optic links in the Northern Region, the survey has already been
completed and the survey reports shall be provided to the contractor for finalisation of drum
schedule.
* The erection/installation of OPGW cable on new transmission lines shall be carried out by
Transmission Line Package Contractor under the supervision of Communication System Package
Contractor. The details of the survey carried out by the Transmission Line Contractors along with
tower spotting data shall be provided to Communication System Package Contractor for this line.
Full co-ordination will be required between this Package Contractor and Tower Package
Contractor. In particular, the required lengths and schedule of delivery of drums of OPGW and
installation fittings shall be co-ordinated and agreed between both parties. The Communication
System Package contractor shall be responsible for OPGW cable testing before handing over of
OPGW cable drums and after installation of OPGW cable in presence of Transmission Line
Package Contractor. The splicing, testing and commissioning shall be carried out by the
Communication System Package Contractor.
Usage of the OPGW cable along with hardware & accessories for other Projects within India
The Employer reserves the right to divert the OPGW cable along with associated hardware &
accessories for requirement in any other Project on replenishment basis. The OPGW drum
schedule and associated hardware & accessories BoQ shall be provided by the employer for the
quantity required for diversion inline with the main quantity. The payment shall be made on the
basis of route length as specified for main quantities. The installation of replenished
OPGW & associated hardware accessories shall be done by the Contractor inline with the main
quantity.
The various sections of this specifications defines the survey, design, performance, installation,
testing & implementation for the fibre optic cable system.
Part-II : Terminal Equipment System
The broad scope of the procurement of this part include the survey, planning, design,
engineering, manufacturing, supply, transportation, insurance, delivery at site, unloading,
handling, storage, installation, termination, testing, training, and demonstration for acceptance,
commissioning, maintenance and documentation for:
a) SDH Equipment along with suitable interfaces & line cards etc.
b) Associated Termination equipment system including E-1 channel banks & drop-insert
muldems, Sub-channel dataplexing, subscriber line interfacing card and digital access &
cross-connect switching (DACS).
c) Network Management System(NMS)
d) -48 Volts DC Power Supply & Battery system
Section-01
Page 4 of 15

e) All cabling, wiring, Digital Distribution Frame patch facilities, equipment MDF's and
interconnections to the supplied equipment at the defined interfaces.
f) All equipment MDF & DDF cross connects required to route and activate circuits.
g) System integration of the supplied subsystems and also integration with existing
communication equipment such as SDH, MUX etc.
h) System integration of the supplied PDH equipments(termination equipment system) with
existing PDH equipments (MUX, Drop-Insert & DACS) for seamless transmission of
communication channel
i) Integration of supplied system with RTUs, PLCC equipment, FODP, Clock, PABX etc.
j) Reconfiguration of communication channel in existing communication equipment
k) Maintenance of the supplied system
l) Supply of spares and test equipment
The above mentioned scope of work specified in Part-II shall be applicable for following two
broad categories.
CATEGORY A:
These are the new links with new equipments such as SDH, PDH, DDF, MDF & DCPS etc to be
implemented under the contract. The work involves in this category is highlighted as below:
Inter connection of subscribers such as RTUs, PLCC, and PABX with PDH equipments
thru MDF.
Inter connection of SDH with FODP & SDH to PDH equipments through DDF.
CATEGORY B:
Fibre Optic links shall be implemented in place of existing Digital Microwave Radio links.
Implementation work shall be carried out in manner down time of running channels is
minimized. The work involves in this category is highlighted as below:
Inter connection of SDH equipment with the existing PDH equipments thru new DDF
NMS channel of existing PDH equipments to be transported on new FO links.
Power supply connection to new SDH equipments with existing -48 V DCPS.
Integration of new PDH equipments with existing PDH equipment for RTU to Control
Centre connectivity
All existing E-1 channels presently running on digital microwave links to be shifted on
fibre optic link.
There could be the possibility of requirement of only PDH equipment at some locations and
necessary cabling & wiring shall be in scope of this package contractor. The contractor shall be
responsible for reconfiguration/re-routing of running communication channels, which may
necessitate due change in network topology.
In addition to above mentioned works, if any other work, required for fully functional system,
shall also be in the scope of contractor.
Section-01
Page 5 of 15

1.4.1 Communication Equipment Integration

The Contractor shall be responsible for integration with various communication network
subsystems viz. Fibre Optic transmission subsystem, Termination subsystem, FO Cabling system,
and also integration with existing fibre optic communication network & PLCC network to ensure
satisfactory overall wideband network performance. The Contractor shall ensure that end-to-end
data and voice channel requirements of RTUs and control centres are satisfied. Integration shall
consist of activities at wideband nodes as listed but not limited to the following:
(i)
All necessary interconnections and interfacing including supply and installation of

cables, wires, MDF/DDF to MDF/DDF cross connects, additional cards/equipment
required for establishing proper inter connections for data, voice, synchronization etc.
Connections may also be required between MDF/DDF located in different
building/nearby sites.
(ii) Detailed channel routing at subscriber channel level, E-1 channel plan etc. and
equipment configuration.
(iii) System wide synchronization
(iv) Consolidated floor plans indicating the location (to be approved by the Employer) of
supplied equipment as well as the equipment which interfaces are required/provided.
(v) Necessary programming/modifications to ensure compatibility between signaling for
voice channels interfaces with other equipment such as PABX etc.
(vi) The contractor shall integrate new termination equipment sub-system with the existing
termination equipment. Alternatively contractor may also provide any other solution for
seamless transmission of communication channels.
1.4.2 Details of Existing Equipment

The make /model number of the existing equipment are as under.
1. Multiplexer Equipment : Make - ABB, Model : FOX515
2. Drop-Insert Multiplexer Equipment : Make - ABB, Model : FOX515
3. DACS Equipment : Make - ABB, Model : FOX515 (Separate DACS Equipment not used)
4. SDH Equipment : Make - Siemens, Model - SMA 1/4
5. Network Management System of ABB & Siemens
1.4.3 Synchronization of the Communication Network
The existing communication network is synchronized with external GPS clock located at RLDC
Shillong . The Contractor shall be responsible for synchronization of new communication
equipment with existing network utilizing the existing clock. The Contractor shall make an
assessment of additional slave clock requirement for synchronization of the communication
equipment.
Section-01
Page 6 of 15

1.4.4 General Technical Requirements (for Communication Equipment)

(i) The SDH equipment / Primary multiplexer shall be offered from a manufacturer(s) who has
been manufacturing SDH equipment/Primary multiplexer for the last three (3) years and SDH
equipment / Primary multiplexer manufactured by such manufacture(s) shall have been in
satisfactory operation in 110 kV or higher voltage Power substations for at least two (2) years as
on the date of opening of Bids.
(ii) The installation of communication equipment shall be done by a firm who has previous
experience of installation, testing and commissioning of at least 20 nodes of Fibre Optic
Transmission System based on SDH technology which and at least 5 no. of these nodes must be
in satisfactory operation for at least two (2) years as on date of opening of bids.
1.4.5 General Requirements

The Contractor is encouraged to offer standard products and designs. However, the Contractor
must conform to the requirements and provide any special equipment necessary to meet the
requirements stated herein.
It should be noted that preliminary information and bill of quantity (BoQ) specified in this
specification are indicative only. The Contractor shall verify the data during the site surveys &
detail engineering and finalise the BoQ as required for ultimate design & system performance.
The Bidder's proposal shall address all functional and performance requirements within this
specification and shall include sufficient information and supporting documentation in order to
determine compliance with this specification without further necessity for inquiries.
The Bidder's proposal shall clearly identify all features described in the specifications or in any
supporting reference material that will not be implemented; otherwise, those features shall
become binding as part of the final contract.
An analysis of the functional and performance requirements of this specification and/or site
survey, design, and engineering may lead the Contractor to conclude that additional items
(hardware/software) are required within the intent of this specification that are not specifically
mentioned in this specification. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing at no added
cost to the Employer, all such additional items such that a viable and fully functional fibre optic
cabling system is implemented that meets or exceeds the capacity and performance requirement
specified. Such materials shall be considered to be within the scope of the contract. To the extent
possible, the Bidders shall identify and include all such additional items (hardware/ software) in
their proposal.
The offered items shall be designed to operate in varying environments. Adequate measures shall
be taken to provide protection against rodents, contaminants, pollutants, water & moisture,
lightning & short circuit, vibration and electro-magnetic interference etc.
The Contractor shall demonstrate a specified level of performance of the offered fibre optic
cables & associated hardware & fittings during well structured factory tests and field tests.
Section-01
Page 7 of 15

All equipment provided shall be designed to interface with other equipment and shall be
supporting all present requirements and spare capacity requirement identified in the technical
specifications.
The bidders are advised to visit sites/routes (at their own expense), prior to the submission of
proposal, and make surveys and assessments as deemed necessary for proposal submission. The
successful bidder (Contractor) is required to visit all sites. The site visits/routes shall include all
necessary surveys to allow the contractor to perform the design and implementation functions.
The Contractor shall inform their site/route survey schedule to the Employer well in advance. The
site/route survey schedule shall be finalised in consultation with the Employer. The Employer
may be associated with the Contractor during their site/route survey activities.
After the site/route survey the Contractor shall submit to the Employer a survey report on each
link and site. This report shall include at least the following items:
a.
b.
List of all span lengths and the total link length for OPGW cable routes.
Suitability for live line installation of OPGW cable on the present infrastructure,
towers, earthwire, etc.
Tower wise identification of type(s) and numbers of fittings & accessories required.
Proposed splice locations and cable drum schedules.
Proposed routing of the approach cable from the end tower/ gantry to the
communication room to be marked on the site layout drawing. The existing cable
trenches/ cable raceways proposed to be used shall be identified. In case suitable
existing cable trenches are not available, suitable alternatives shall be suggested.
Proposed layout of Equipment in the existing rooms and buildings.
Proposed routing of power, earthing, signal cables and patch cords etc.
Confirmation of adequacy of Space and AC/DC Power supply requirements
Proposals for new rooms/buildings if required
Identification of facility modifications if required
Identify all additional items required for integration for each site/location.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
1.5
Systems to be supported
The following systems shall be supported by the proposed Communications Network.

1.5.1 EMS/SCADA Systems
The Fibre Optic communication system shall support the data & voice requirement for
SCADA/EMS. Some of the RTUs channels are transported to Control Centre either through
PLCC or through PLCC up to wideband node.
1.6 General Responsibilities and Obligations
This section describes the general responsibilities and obligations of the Contractor and the
Employer.
Section-01
Page 8 of 15

1.6.1
Responsibilities for the Implementation Plan
The Bidder's technical proposal shall include a project implementation plan and schedule that is
consistent with the implementation plan detailed in the technical specification. The
implementation plan shall be modelled such that it provides Communication equipment system
support for SCADA/EMS system for the Project. The Implementation plan shall include the
activities of both the Contractor and the Employer, showing all key milestones and clearly
identifying the nature of all information and project support expected from the Employer. The
Employer and Contractor shall finalise the detailed Implementation plan following award of the
contract.
1.6.2
Contractor Responsibilities and Obligations
The Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of Communication System Package.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all cables and wiring associated with the equipment
provided, both inside and outside buildings in accordance with technical specifications. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for determining the adequacy of the local power source for
the equipment and for wiring to it, with adequate circuit protective breakers. In addition, the
Contractor shall be responsible for shielding equipment and cabling to eliminate potential
interference to or from the equipment, and for earthing all cabinets and shields.
The Contractor's obligations include, but are not limited to, the following:
(1) Provide a working system that meets the functional and performance requirements of this
specification.
(2) Obtaining statutory clearances from regulatory bodies, statutory bodies such as municipality,
highway authority, electrical utilities, forest department, gas authorities etc. on behalf of
Employer as detailed in technical specifications.
(3) Engineering and design specific to each location including review of, and conformance with
local environmental and earthing requirements.
(4) Inputs for finalisation of installation and safety guidelines and procedures for the stringing,
mechanical installation as required.
(5) Development of installation guidelines and procedures for the stringing, mechanical
installation, and splicing of all Overhead Fibre Optic Cable, including testing and
documentation.
(6) Project management, project scheduling, including monthly project reports documenting
progress during the contract period.
(7) Co-ordination with Tower Package Contractors for phased implementation and
commissioning of the overall OPGW cable
Section-01
Page 9 of 15

(8) Engineering and technical assistance during the contract and warranty period and annual
maintenance contract (AMC) Period.
(9) Site visits, path surveys, and studies necessary to identify and provide all equipment needed
to implement the FO cables installation.
(10) Overall integration of communication equipments/subsystem procured in present and other
telecom packages of the SC&C project & existing network
(11) All cabling, wiring including supply, laying and termination etc of the cables, and main
distribution frame (MDF) at wideband nodes required for full interconnectivity and proper
operation of the telecommunications network including equipment supplied under this
package and the connectivity and interfacing of PLC, PABX etc.
(12) Connectivity between the FODP and SDH equipment.
(13) Providing 48 Volts DCPS system & Battery.
(14) Installation and integration of network management software, hardware and firmware.
(15) Provide all additional Equipment necessary to ensure compatibility between new and
existing equipment.
(16) Implement all minor civil works and identify any major civil works i.e. expansion or
construction of rooms, trenches necessary for installation of proposed equipment and provide
the details of such work to the Employer.
(17) Define source power requirements for each cabinet/ rack of equipment provided at each
location.
(18) All hardware, software, and firmware required to satisfy the requirements of this
Specification.
(19) Factory and site testing of all hardware, software, and firmware provided.
(20) Provide documented evidence of satisfactory Type Test performance to the Employer and if
required by The Employer, conduct type test.
(21) Provide a Quality Assurance Plan, ensuring the Employer access to the manufacturing
process.
(22) Shipment of all equipment and documentation to the Employer designated locations and/or
staging areas.
(23) Staging, maintenance of staging area and security including full responsibility for
protection from theft and fire.
(24) An availability analysis showing MTBF (mean-time-between-failure) and MTTR
(mean-time-to-repair) figures for all system components.
(25) Hardware, software, and firmware maintenance, debugging, and support of the equipment
Section-01
Page 10 of 15

through final acceptance, and maintenance on all new equipment through the warranty
period and for a period of six(6) years after warranty period.
(26) Availability of service, spare and expansion parts for the supplied items for the designed
life of the item or seven (7) years after the declaration of withdrawal of equipment from
production, whichever is earlier. However, the termination of production shall not occur
prior to Operational Acceptance of the system by the Employer.
(27) Notification services for field updates to the hardware, software, and firmware for ensuring
the availability of the supplied hardware & software including NMS for the entire lifespan.
(28) Integration with existing PDH equipments (MUX, Drop-Insert, DACS) with new provided
equipments (MUX, Drop-Insert, DACS, SDH).
(29) For any renovation, expansion or construction of facilities required to be carried out by
Employer, the Contractor shall provide in the survey report the details necessary to enable
such work to be carried out.
(30) Assessment of suitability for live line installation of overhead FO cable on the present
infrastructure, towers etc.
(31) Design and Installation of the mechanical assemblies and accessories, including vibration
dampers required for installation of all overhead fibre cable. To conduct structural analysis
and to carry out tower strengthening if required, any or all additional steel work or
modifications required to attach the overhead fibre cables shall also be carried out by the
Contractor. Design data of towers shall be provided by the Employer.
(32) Dismantling the existing earthwire & hardware wherever overhead FO cables (OPGW) is to
be installed on existing lines, and for the preservation and transportation of the dismantled
earthwire & hardware to designated stores.
(33) Factory and Site acceptance testing of all equipment provided.
(34) Conduct type tests and provide documented evidence of satisfactory Type Test performance
to the Employer.
(35) Provide a Quality Assurance Plan ensuring the Employer access to the manufacturing
process.
(36) Shipment of all equipment and documentation to the Employer designated locations and/or
staging areas.
(37) Staging, maintenance and security of staging area including full responsibility for protection
from theft and fire.
(38) All documentation and drawings as specified.
Section-01
Page 11 of 15

(39) Training of the Employer personnel.

(40) All required spare parts, maintenance aids, and test equipment.
(41) All Fibre Optic Distribution frame patch facilities.
(42) Maintenance and support of the equipment through final acceptance, and maintenance on all
new equipment through the warranty period and annual maintenance contract period.
(43) Ensure the availability of service, spare and expansion parts for all equipment for the life of
the equipment.
(44) Due diligence in properly planning and executing the work so as to minimise any damage to
crop, forestry or vegetation, internal utilities of any private or government party.
(45) The contractor shall appoint key personnel for the project such as Project Manager, Site
Manager, Design Engineer, Installation Engineer and Commissioning Engineer only after
approval of the experience data by the Employer. Approval of the Employer shall be
obtained, whenever the Contractor wants to change key personnel.
Detailed descriptions of the Contractor's obligations, in relation to individual items of hardware,
functions and services, are delineated in other sections of this specification.
1.6.3 The Employer Responsibilities and Obligations
The Employer will provide the following items and services as part of the procurement Project:
(1) Overall project management of the Project.
(2) Review and approval of the Contractor's designs, drawings, survey report and
recommendations.
(3) Communication network configuration data, including:
(a) Channel assignments for voice and data
(b) Interconnection drawings for existing equipment, including MDFs.
(4) Review and approval of test procedures.
(5) Participation in and approval of Type, Factory and Site Acceptance tests.
(6) Review & approval of training plans
(7) Providing support and access to facilities at the sites.
(8) Implement major civil works such as expansion or construction of room, necessary
renovations required for the equipment to be provided by the Contractor.
Section-01
Page 12 of 15

(9) Provide to the extent possible drawings for existing sites and facilities for which equipment
installation are planned.
(10) Assistance in Obtaining statutory clearances from regulatory bodies, payment of restoration
charges
(11) Compensation for crop, forestry or vegetation damage unavoidably caused by the Contractor
during the course of performance of work. The Contractor shall take due diligence in properly
planning and executing the work so as to minimise any such damage.
(12) Approval of the key personnel for the project.
1.7
General Bidding Requirements
The Bidder shall be responsive to the Employer's technical requirements as set forth in this
specification. The Bidder's proposal shall include the following:
(1)The Technical Proposal including the documents listed in the table 1-1: Bid Documents
Checklist, shall be provided in the bid.
.
(3) The bidder shall submit with their proposal, performance certificates for all the offered
equipment i.e. SDH, Multiplexer, DCPS etc. from at least one customer. The performance
certificates shall provide evidence of successful operation of the proposed equipment for at least
one year as on date of bid opening.
(4) A commitment and a clearly defined plan to provide system support in India and capability of
providing a full range of local services for the life of the delivered systems.
(5) The bidder may offer the bought-out items from more than one manufacturer. In case of QR
items, the bidder shall provide supporting qualification document also.
Table 1-1;
Bid Documents Checklist
S.No.
Description:
Completed Data Requirement Sheets

(As per relevant Sections of Technical Specs)
Page no.
Ref no.
Quality Assurance Program

(As per relevant Sections of Technical Specs )
Page no.
Ref no.
Section-01
Technical brochures/details of the offered

product
Enclosure Reference
Page no.
Ref no.
Page 13 of 15

Table 1-1;
Bid Documents Checklist
S.No.
4
1.8
Description:
Performance Certificate
Enclosure Reference
Page no.
Ref no.
Table of Compliance
Bidder shall use one copy of Volume I, "Conditions of Contract," and Volume II, "Technical
Specifications" to indicate compliance status with those volumes. Within the right-hand margin,
Bidder shall indicate compliance status to each paragraph along with a cross-reference to its
proposal and an index key for any explanation or comment.
In addition, the Bidder shall annotate the Table of Contents of each of the above stated volumes
to provide a high-level summary of compliance status. In both cases, the following symbols, and
no others, shall be used:
C
- Bid complies with all requirements in the adjacent paragraph.
A - Bid is not compliant with the requirements in the adjacent paragraph, but a functional
alternative is proposed.
X - Bid takes exception to the requirements of the adjacent paragraph and no functional
alternative is proposed.
Only one symbol shall be assigned a paragraph and shall indicate the worst case level of
compliance for that paragraph. This annotation may be handwritten.
Bidder shall also underline, on the compliance copy, all requirements to which exceptions have
been taken (X) or to which alternatives have been proposed (A).
Each alternative shall be clearly and explicitly described. Such descriptions shall use the same
paragraph numbering as the bid document sections addressed by the alternatives. All alternative
descriptions shall be in one contiguous section of the Bidder's proposal, preferably in the same
volume, and titled "Alternatives." A separate section titled "Exceptions" should be provided
containing any discussion or explanation Bidder chooses to provide concerning exceptions taken.
Alternatives which do not substantially comply with the intent of the bid documents will be
considered exceptions.
The Employer will assess the merits of each alternative and exception and will be the sole judge
as to their acceptance.
1.9
Organization of The Technical Specification Document
Sections & appendices of technical specifications provides the technical & implementation
Section-01
Page 14 of 15

requirements of the Package.

Section 2 : OPGW cabling and associated hardware & fittings
Section 3: Network Configuration and Equipment Characteristics
Section 4: DC Power Supply System
Section 5: Environment, EMI, Power Supply, Cabling and Earthing
Section 6: Inspection and testing requirements
Section 7: Training and Support Services
Section 8: Documentation & deliverable requirements
Section 9: Project management, schedule and implementation requirements.
Appendix A - General requirements & Implementation Schedule
Appendix B - Bill of Quantity
Appendix C - Data Requirement Sheets
1.10
Applicable Standards
The applicable standards are mentioned in the respective technical section. The offered
equipment shall conform to the standards mentioned in the specification except to the extent
modified by this specification. In case of any discrepancy between the description given in the
specification and the standards, the provisions of the technical specification shall be followed.
The parameters not specifically mentioned in this specification shall conform to the standard
mentioned in this specification.
Specifications and codes shall be the latest version, inclusive of revisions, which are in force at
the date of the contract award. Where new specifications, codes, and revisions are issued during
the period of the contract, the Contractor shall attempt to comply with such, provided that no
additional expenses are charged to the Employer without Employer's written consent.
In the event the Contractor offers to supply material and/or equipment in compliance to any
standard other than Standards listed herein, the Contractor shall include with their proposal, full
salient characteristics of the new standard for comparison.
1.11
References
(1) CIGRE Guide for Planning of Power Utility Digital Communications Networks
(2) CIGRE Optical Fibre Planning Guide for Power Utilities
(3)
CIGRE New Opportunities for Optical Fibre Technology in Electricity Utilities
(4) CIGRE guide to fittings for Optical Cables on Transmission Lines.
..End of the Section
Section-01
Page 15 of 15

Section-2
OPGW Cabling & Associated Hardware & Fittings
Index
2.1
Fibre Optic Cabling .................................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 Required Optical Fibre Characteristics .................................................................... 3

2.1.1.1 Physical Characteristics ................................................................................... 3
2.1.1.2 Attenuation ....................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Fibre Optic Cable Construction ................................................................................. 4
2.1.2.1 Transmission Line Details .................................................................................... 5
2.1.2.2 Optical Fibre Cable Link Lengths ......................................................................... 5
2.1.2.3 Optical Fibre Identification ................................................................................... 5
2.1.2.4 Buffer Tube .......................................................................................................... 5
2.1.2.5 Optical Fibre Strain & Sag-tension chart .............................................................. 5
2.1.2.6 Cable Materials .................................................................................................... 6
2.1.2.6.1 Filling Materials .................................................................................................... 7
2.1.2.6.2 Metallic Members ................................................................................................. 7
2.1.2.6.3 Marking, Packaging and Shipping ........................................................................ 7
2.1.2.7 OPGW cable installation requirements ................................................................ 8
2.1.2.8 Optical Ground Wire (OPGW) ............................................................................. 8
2.1.2.8.1 Central Fibre Optic Unit ....................................................................................... 9
2.1.2.8.2 Basic Construction ............................................................................................... 9
2.1.2.8.3 Breaking Strength ................................................................................................ 9
2.1.2.8.4 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements ........................................................... 10
2.1.2.8.5 Operating conditions .......................................................................................... 10
2.1.2.8.6 Installation .......................................................................................................... 10
2.1.2.8.7 Installation Hardware ......................................................................................... 11
Section-02
Page 1 of 17

2.1.3 Fibre Optic Splice Enclosures (Joint Box) .............................................................. 13

2.1.3.1 Optical Fibre Splices...12
2.1.4 Fibre Optic Approach Cables ................................................................................. 14
2.1.4.1 Basic Construction ............................................................................................. 14
2.1.4.2 Jacket Construction & Material........................................................................... 14
2.1.4.3 Optical, Electrical and Mechanical Requirements .............................................. 14
2.1.5 Installation of Approach Cable ................................................................................ 15
2.1.6 Optical Fibre Termination and Splicing .................................................................... 15
2.1.6.1 Fibre Optic Distribution Panel............................................................................. 15
2.1.6.2 Optical Fibre Connectors ................................................................................... 16
2.1.7 Service Loops ......................................................................................................... 16
2.1.8 Methodology For Installation And Termination ....................................................... 16
2.1.9
Cable Raceways................................................................................................... 17
Section-02
Page 2 of 17

Section-2
OPGW cabling and associated hardware & fittings
This section describes the functional & technical specifications of OPGW cabling and associated
hardware & fittings.
2.1 Fibre Optic Cabling
This section defines the requirements for G.652D Dual-window Single mode (DWSM)
telecommunications grade fibre optic cable. Bidders shall furnish with their bids, detailed descriptions
of the fibres & cable(s) proposed.
All optical fibre cabling including fibre itself and all associated installation hardware shall have a
minimum guaranteed design life span of 25 years. Documentary evidence in support of guaranteed life
span of cable & fibre shall be submitted by the Contractor during detailed engineering.
2.1.1 Required Optical Fibre Characteristics
This section describes the characteristics of optical fibre to be provided under this specification.
2.1.1.1 Physical Characteristics
Dual-Window Single mode (DWSM), G.652D optical fibres shall be provided in the fibre optic cables.
DWSM optical fibres shall meet the requirements defined in Table 2-1(a).
2.1.1.2 Attenuation
The attenuation coefficient for wavelengths between 1525 nm and 1575 nm shall not exceed the
attenuation coefficient at 1550 nm by more than 0.05 dB/km. The attenuation coefficient between 1285
nm and 1330 nm shall not exceed the attenuation coefficient at 1310 nm by more than 0.05 dB/km. The
attenuation of the fibre shall be distributed uniformly throughout its length such that there are no point
discontinuities in excess of 0.10 dB. The fibre attenuation characteristics specified in table 2-1 (a) shall
be guaranteed fibre attenuation of any & every fibre reel.
The overall optical fibre path attenuation shall not be more than calculated below:
Maximum attenuation @ 1550nm: 0.21 dB/km x total km + 0.05 dB/splice x no. of splices + 0.5
dB/connector x no. of connectors
Maximum attenuation @ 1310nm: 0.35dB/km x total km + 0.05 dB/splice x no. of splices + 0.5
dB/connector x no. of connectors
Section-02
Page 3 of 17

Table 2-1(a)
DWSM Optical Fibre Characteristics
Fibre Description:
Dual-Window Single-Mode
Mode Field Diameter:
8.6 to 9.5 m ( 0.6m )
Cladding Diameter:
125.0 m 1 m
Mode field concentricity error
0.6m
Cladding non-circularity
Cable Cut-off Wavelength cc
1260 nm
1550 nm loss performance
As per G.652 D
Proof Test Level
0.69 Gpa
Attenuation Coefficient:
@ 1310 nm
@ 1550 nm
Chromatic Dispersion; Maximum:
18 ps/(nm x km) @ 1550 nm

3.5 ps/(nm x km) 1288-1339nm
5.3 ps/(nm x km) 1271-1360nm
Zero Dispersion Wavelength:

Zero Dispersion Slope:
Polarization mode dispersion
coefficient
0.35 dB/km
0.21 dB/km
1300 to 1324nm
0.092 ps/(nm2xkm) maximum
0.2 ps/km^
Temperature Dependence:
Induced attenuation 0.05 dB (-60C - +85C )
Bend Performance:
@ 1310 nm (752 mm dia Mandrel), 100 turns;

Attenuation Rise 0.05 dB
@ 1550 nm (301 mm radius Mandrel), 100 turns;
@ 1550 nm (320.5 mm dia Mandrel, 1 turn;
2.1.2 Fibre Optic Cable Construction

Overhead Fibre Optic Cables shall be OPGW (Optical Ground Wire). The OPGW cable is proposed
to be installed on transmission lines. The design of cable shall account for the varying operating and
environmental conditions that the cable shall experience while in service. The OPGW cable to be
supplied shall be designed to meet the overall requirements of all the transmission lines. Normally the
tower span of the lines shall not exceed 600m, however, some of the spans may be up to around 1000m
or more. The exact details shall be collected by the Contractor during survey. To meet the overall
requirement of all the transmission lines, the contractor may offer more than one design without any
additional cost to POWERGRID, in case span length of more than 600m is found during survey. It may
also be noted that some of the transmission lines route may be added during the engineering stage.
Section-02
Page 4 of 17

2.1.2.1 Transmission Line Details

Typical details of transmission lines are indicated in the Appendices. Any other details, as required for
cable design etc. shall be collected by the Contractor during survey.
2.1.2.2
Optical Fibre Cable Link Lengths
The estimated optical fibre link lengths are provided in Appendices. However, the Contractor shall
supply & install the optical fibre cable as required based on detailed site survey to be carried out by the
Contractor during the project execution. The Contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
For the purpose of payment, the optical fibre link lengths are defined as transmission line route lengths
from Gantry at one terminating station to the Gantry in the other terminating station. The actual cable
lengths to be delivered shall take into account various factors such as sag, service loops, splicing,
working lengths & wastage etc. and no additional payment shall be payable in this regard. The unit
rate for FO cable quoted in the Bid price Schedules shall take into account all such factors.
2.1.2.3 Optical Fibre Identification
Individual optical fibres within a fibre unit and fibre units shall be identifiable in accordance with
EIA/TIA 598 or IEC 60304 or Bellcore GR-20 colour-coding scheme.
Colouring utilized for colour coding optical fibres shall be integrated into the fibre coating and shall
be homogenous. The colour shall not bleed from one fibre to another and shall not fade during fibre
preparation for termination or splicing.
Each cable shall have traceability of each fibre back to the original fibre manufacturer's fibre number
and parameters of the fibre. If more than the specified number of fibres are included in any cable, the
spare fibres shall be tested by the cable manufacturer and any defective fibres shall be suitably
bundled, tagged and identified at the factory by the vendor.
2.1.2.4 Buffer Tube
Loose tube construction shall be implemented. The individually coated optical fibre(s) shall be
surrounded by a buffer for protection from physical damage during fabrication, installation and
operation of the cable. The fibre coating and buffer shall be strippable for splicing and termination.
Each fibre unit shall be individually identifiable utilizing colour coding. Buffer tubes shall be filled
with a water-blocking gel.
2.1.2.5 Optical Fibre Strain & Sag-tension chart
The fibre optic cable shall be designed and installed such that the optical fibres experience no strain
under all loading conditions defined in IS 802. Zero fibre strain condition shall apply even after a 25
year cable creep.
For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall apply:
Maximum Working Tension (MWT) is defined as the maximum cable tension at which there is
no fibre strain.
Section-02
Page 5 of 17

The no fibre strain condition is defined as fibre strain of less than or equal to 0.05%, as
determined by direct measurements through IEC/ ETSI (FOTP) specified optical reflectometry
techniques.
The Cable strain margin is defined as the maximum cable strain at which there is no fibre
strain.
The cable Maximum Allowable Tension (MAT) is defined as the maximum tension
experienced by the Cable under the worst case loading condition.
The cable max strain is defined as the maximum strain experienced by the Cable under the
worst case loading condition.
The cable Every Day Tension (EDT) is defined as the maximum cable tension on any span
under normal conditions.
The Ultimate /Rated Tensile Strength (UTS/ RTS/ breaking strength) is defined as the
maximum tensile load applied and held constant for one minute at which the specimen shall
not break.
While preparing the Sag-tension charts for the OPGW cable the following conditions shall be met:
The Max Allowable Tension (MAT) / max strain shall be less than or equal to the MWT/
Strain margin of the cable.
The sag shall not exceed the earth wire sag in all conditions.
The Max Allowable Tension shall also be less than or equal to 0.4 times the UTS.
The 25 year creep at 25% of UTS (creep test as per IEEE 1138) shall be such that the 25 year
creep plus the cable strain at Max Allowable Tension (MAT) is less than or equal to the
cable strain margin.
The everyday tension (EDT) shall not exceed 20% of the UTS for the OPGW cable.
The Sag-tension chart of OPGW cable indicating the maximum tension, cable strain and sag shall be
calculated and submitted along with the bid under various conditions mentioned below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
53 C , no wind and no ice

32 C, no wind and no ice
0C, no wind and no ice
32 C, full wind and no ice
32 C, 75% full wind and no ice
0 C, 2/3rd / 36% of full wind (IS 802:1977/1995)
The above cases shall be considered for the spans from 100 m to 600 m or higher span length in the
range of 50 m spans. Max. vertical sag, max. tension and max sag at 0 C & no wind shall be
considered for in line with the design parameter of transmission line. The typical details are indicated in
the Appendices. The full wind load shall be considered as the design wind load for all the specified
transmission lines as per relevant IS 802 version and the sag-tension chart shall be submitted
considering the transmission lines. The Contractor shall submit the stringing chart for review of
Employer.
2.1.2.6 Cable Materials
The materials used for optical fibre cable construction, shall meet the following requirements:
Section-02
Page 6 of 17

2.1.2.6.1 Filling Materials

The interstices of the fibre optic unit and cable shall be filled with a suitable compound to prohibit any
moisture ingress or any water longitudinal migration within the fibre optic unit or along the fibre optic
cable. The water tightness of the cable shall meet or exceed the test performance criteria as per IEC794-1-F-5.
The filling compound used shall be a non-toxic homogenous waterproofing compound that is free of
dirt and foreign matter, nonhygroscopic, electrically nonconductive and non-nutritive to fungus. The
compound shall also be fully compatible with all cable components it may come in contact with and
shall inhibit the generation of hydrogen within the cable.
The waterproofing filling materials shall not affect fibre coating, colour coding, or encapsulant
commonly used in splice enclosures, shall be dermatologically safe, non-staining and easily removable
with a non-toxic cleaning solvent.
2.1.2.6.2 Metallic Members
When the fibre optic cable design incorporates metallic elements in its construction, all metallic
elements shall be electrically continuous.
2.1.2.6.3 Marking, Packaging and Shipping
This section describes the requirements for marking, packaging and shipping the overhead fibre optic
cable.
(a)
Drum Markings: Each side of every reel of cable shall be permanently marked in white lettering
with the vendors' address, the Purchasers destination address, cable part number and
specification as to the type of cable, length, number of fibres, a unique drum number including
the name of the transmission line & segment no., factory inspection stamp and date.
(b)
Cable Drums: All optical fibre cabling shall be supplied on strong drums provided with lagging
of adequate strength, constructed to protect the cabling against all damage and displacement
during transit, storage and subsequent handling during installation. Both ends of the cable shall
be sealed as to prevent the escape of filling compounds and dust & moisture ingress during
shipment and handling. Spare cable caps shall be provided with each drum as required.
The spare cable shall be supplied on sturdy, corrosion resistant, steel drums suitable for long
periods of storage and re-transport & handling.
There shall be no factory splices allowed within a continuous length of cable. Only one continuous
cable length shall be provided on each drum. The lengths of cable to be supplied on each drum shall be
determined by a "schedule" prepared by the Contractor.
Section-02
Page 7 of 17

2.1.2.7 OPGW cable installation requirements

Most of the OPGW fibre optic cables to be installed under this project shall be installed under live line
conditions, i.e. with all the circuits of the transmission line charged to their rated voltage. However,
some of OPGW cables may be installed in off-line conditions. The tentative bill of quantities for both
live-line as well as off-line OPGW cable system installations have been specified in the appendices and
the actual quantities for both types shall be finalised during project execution after detailed survey.
Under live line installation, the OPGW cable shall be installed on transmission lines under live line
conditions, i.e. with all the circuits of the transmission line charged to their rated voltage.
The OPGW cable shall be installed at the top of the tower by replacing the existing ground wire. The
Contractor shall carry out re-tensioning of the existing earth wire wherever required to maintain the
adequate clearances for live line stringing of fibre optic cables. However, in exceptional cases
installation of OPGW cable below conductor may also be considered on low voltage lines which shall
be decided during detailed engineering.
For the new Transmission lines namely Namsai(PG) to Tinsukia, the stringing of OPGW cable shall
be carried out by Transmission Line Tower Package Contractor(s) as per the stringing chart/procedure
submitted by them and approved by Employer/Communication system Package Contractor. The
splicing work shall be carried out by Communication system Package Contractor. All hardware &
fittings needed to tie the OPGW to the towers/gantries shall be provided by Communication system
Package Contractor to the transmission line tower contractor.
While handing over the OPGW drums, the testing (fibre loss and length measurement using OTDR) of
OPGW in each drum shall be carried out by Communication system Package Contractor in presence of
Tower package contractor(s) and Employers representative. After installation of OPGW cable, the
testing of each section shall be carried out again by the Communication System Package Contractor in
presence of Tower package contractor(s) and Employer representative. In case of any damage/high loss
in the fibre, the total length of that particular section of OPGW cable shall be replaced by Tower
package Contractor(s). Communication System Package Contractor shall supply new OPGW cable
drum in place of damaged cable drum. The Contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
Supervision of Installation -The Communication System Package Contractor shall supervise the
stringing at site as per the approved stringing procedure. Site visit for supervision shall be carried out as
per instructions of Employer. The man-days for site supervision is identified in Appendix-B. However,
the contract price shall be adjusted as per the actual requirement. The Supervision/Inspection work in
Contractors scope shall mainly include inspection as per stringing procedure, proper location of drum
site, installation of stringing blocks/pulleys, proper sagging, proper installation of hardware, proper
tension as per Sag-Tension chart, provision of service loops of OPGW in jointing locations etc.
2.1.2.8
Optical Ground Wire (OPGW)
OPGW cable construction shall comply with IEEE-1138, 2009. The cable provided shall meet both the
construction and performance requirements such that the ground wire function, the optical fibre
integrity and optical transmission characteristics are suitable for the intended purpose. The cable shall
consist of optical fibre units as defined in this specification. There shall be no factory splices within the
cable structure of a continuous cable length.
Section-02
Page 8 of 17

The composite fibre optic overhead ground wire shall be made up of multiple buffer tubes embedded in
a water tight aluminium / aluminium alloy/stainless steel protective central fibre optic unit surrounded
by concentric-lay stranded metallic wires in single or multiple layers. Each buffer tube shall have
maximum 12 no. of fibres. All fibres in a single buffer tube or directly in central fibre optic unit is not
acceptable. The dual purpose of the composite cable is to provide the electrical and physical
characteristics of conventional overhead ground wire while providing the optical transmission
properties of optical fibre.
2.1.2.8.1 Central Fibre Optic Unit
The central fibre optic unit shall be designed to house and protect multiple buffered optical fibre units
from damage due to forces such as crushing, bending, twisting, tensile stress and moisture. The central
fibre optic unit and the outer stranded metallic conductors shall serve together as an integral unit to
protect the optical fibres from degradation due to vibration and galloping, wind and ice loadings, wide
temperature variations, lightning and fault current, as well as environmental effects which may produce
hydrogen.
The OPGW design of dissimilar materials such as stainless steel tube with aluminium or aluminium
clad-steel wire strands are not allowed. Central fibre optic unit may be of aluminium or stainless steel
tube with aluminium protective coating. In case of aluminium protective coating, the coating must
completely cover the tubes leaving no exposed areas of tubing that can make electrical contact either
directly or indirectly through moisture, contamination, protrusions, etc with the surrounding stranded
wires. The tube may be fabricated as a seamless tube, seam welded, or a tube without a welded seam.
2.1.2.8.2 Basic Construction
The cable construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of this specification, applicable
clauses of IEC 61089 related to stranded conductors and Table 2.2(a) OPGW Mechanical and Electrical
Characteristics. In addition, the basic construction shall include bare concentric-lay-stranded metallic
wires with the outer layer having left hand lay. The wires may be of multiple layers with a combination
of various metallic wires within each layer. The direction of lay for each successive layer shall be
reversed. The finished wires shall contain no joints or splices unless otherwise agreed to by the
Employer and shall conform to all applicable clauses of IEC 61089 as they pertain to stranded
conductors.
The wires shall be so stranded that when the complete OPGW is cut, the individual wires can be readily
regrouped and then held in place by one hand.
2.1.2.8.3 Breaking Strength
The rated breaking strength of the completed OPGW shall be taken as no more than 90 percent of the
sum of the rated breaking strengths of the individual wires, calculated from their nominal diameter and
the specified minimum tensile strength.
The rated breaking strength shall not include the strength of the optical unit. The fibre optic unit shall
not be considered a load bearing tension member when determining the total rated breaking strength of
the composite conductor.
Section-02
Page 9 of 17

2.1.2.8.4 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

Table 2-2(a) provides OPGW Electrical and Mechanical Requirements for the minimum performance
characteristics. Additionally, the OPGW mechanical & electrical characteristics shall be similar to that
of the earthwire being replaced such that there is no or minimal consequential increase in stresses on
towers. For the purposes of determining the appropriate Max Working Tension limit for the OPGW
cable IS 802:1995 and IS 875: 1987 shall be applied. However the OPGW installation sag & tension
charts shall be based on IS 802 version to which the line is originally designed. For the OPGW cable
design selection and preparation of sag tension charts, the limits specified in this section shall also be
satisfied. The Bidder shall submit sag-tension charts for the above cases with their bids.
Table 2.2(a)
OPGW Electrical and Mechanical Requirements
(1)
Everyday Tension
20% of UTS of OPGW
(2)
D.C. Resistance at 20C:
< 1.0 ohm/Km
(3)
Short Circuit Current:
6.32 kA for 1.0 second
2.1.2.8.5 Operating conditions

Since OPGW shall be located at the top of the EHV transmission line support structure, it will be
subjected to Aeolian vibration, Galloping and Lightning strikes. It will also carry ground fault currents.
Therefore, its electrical and mechanical properties shall be same or similar as those required of
conventional ground conductors.
2.1.2.8.6 Installation
OPGW installed under live line condition, i.e. with all circuits charged to the rated line voltage as
specified in this section shall be generally in accordance with the IEEE Guide to the Installation of
Overhead Transmission Line Conductors (IEEE STD. 524 with latest revisions), with additional
instructions and precautions for live line working and fibre optic cable handling. The stringing
procedure shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to stringing for Employers approval.
A tower structural analysis shall be carried out by the Contractor, based on the relevant data to be
provided by Employer, to ensure that with the replacement of existing earthwire with the OPGW cable,
the tower members remain within the statutory safety limits as per Indian Electricity rules and if
required the Contractor shall carry out the tower strengthening as necessary. The OPGW cable sections
shall normally be terminated & spliced only on tension towers. In exceptional circumstances, and on
Employer specific approval, cable may be terminated on Suspension towers, but in this case tower
strength shall be examined to ensure that tower loads are within safe limits and if required, necessary
tower strengthening shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Section-02
Page 10 of 17

2.1.2.8.7 Installation Hardware

The scope of supply of the optical cable includes the assessment, supply and installation of all required
fittings and hardware such as Tension assembly, Suspension assembly, Vibration dampers, Reinforcing
rods, Earthing clamps, Downlead clamps, splice enclosure etc. The Bidder shall provide documentation
justifying the adequacy and suitability of the hardware supplied. The quantity of hardware & fittings to
meet any eventuality during site installation min. @1% shall also be provided as part of set/km. for
each transmission line without any additional cost to POWERGRID. The Contractor shall determine
the exact requirements of all accessories required to install and secure the OPGW.
The OPGW hardware fittings and accessories shall follow the general requirements regarding design,
materials, dimensions & tolerances, protection against corrosion and markings as specified in clause
4.0 of EN 61284: 1997 (IEC 61284). The shear strength of all bolts shall be at least 1.5 times the
maximum installation torque. The OPGW hardware & accessories drawing & Data Requirement Sheets
(DRS) document shall consist of three parts: (1) A technical particulars sheet (2) An assembly drawing
i.e. level 1 drawing and (3) Component level drawings i.e. level 2 & lower drawings. All component
reference numbers, dimensions and tolerances, bolt tightening torques & shear strength and ratings
such as UTS, slip strength etc shall be marked on the drawings.
The fittings and accessories described herein are indicative of installation hardware typically used for
OPGW installations and shall not necessarily be limited to the following:
(a) Suspension Assemblies: Preformed armour grip suspension clamps and aluminium alloy
armour rods/ reinforcing rods shall be used. The suspension clamps shall be designed to carry
a vertical load of not less than 25 KN. The suspension clamps slippage shall occur between
12kN and 17 kN as measured in accordance with type test procedures specified in Appendix,
Vol. II.
The Contractor shall supply all the components of the suspension assembly including
shackles, bolts, nuts, washers, split pins, etc. The total drop of the suspension assembly shall
not exceed 150 mm (measured from the centre point of attachment to the centre point of the
OPGW). The design of the assembly shall be such that the direction of run of the OPGW
shall be the same as that of the conductor.
(b) Dead End Clamp Assemblies: All dead end clamp assemblies shall preferably be of
performed armoured grip type and shall include all necessary hardware for attaching the
assembly to the tower strain plates. Dead end clamps shall allow the OPGW to pass through
continuously without cable cutting. The slip strength shall be rated not less than 95% of the
rated tensile strength of the OPGW.
(c) Clamp Assembly Earthing Wire: Earthing wire consisting of a 1500 mm length of aluminium
or aluminium alloy conductor equivalent in size to the OPGW shall be used to earth
suspension and dead end clamp assemblies to the tower structure. The earthing wire shall be
permanently fitted with lugs at each end. The lugs shall be attached to the clamp assembly at
one end and the tower structure at the other.
(d) Structure Attachment Clamp Assemblies: Clamp assemblies used to attach the OPGW to the
structures, shall have two parallel grooves for the OPGW, one on either side of the connecting
bolt. The clamps shall be such that clamping characteristics do not alter adversely when only
one OPGW is installed. The tower attachment plates shall locate the OPGW on the inside of
Section-02
Page 11 of 17

the tower and shall be attached directly to the tower legs/cross-members without drilling or
any other structural modifications.
(e)
Vibration Dampers: Vibration dampers type 4R Stockbridge or equivalent, having four (4)
different frequencies spread within the Aeolian frequency bandwidth corresponding to wind
speed of 1m/s to 7 m/s, shall be used for suspension and tension points in each span. The
Contractor shall determine the exact numbers and placement(s) of vibration dampers through a
detailed vibration analysis as specified in technical specifications.
One damper minimum on each side per OPGW cable for suspension points and two dampers
minimum on each side per OPGW cable for tension points shall be used for nominal design
span of 400 meters. For all other ruling spans, the number of vibration damper shall be based
on vibration analysis.
The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of high strength aluminum alloy of type LM6. It shall be capable of supporting the damper and prevent damage or chaffing of the conductor
during erection or continued operation. The clamp shall have smooth and permanent grip to
keep the damper in position on the OPGW cable without damaging the strands or causing
premature fatigue failure of the OPGW cable under the clamp. The clamp groove shall be in
uniform contact with the OPGW cable over the entire clamping surface except for the rounded
edges. The groove of the clamp body and clamp cap shall be smooth, free from projections, grit
or other materials which could cause damage to the OPGW cable when the clamp is installed.
Clamping bolts shall be provided with self locking nuts and designed to prevent corrosion of
threads or loosening in service.
The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanised steel/stain less steel. It shall be
of preformed and post formed quality in order to prevent subsequent droop of weight and to
maintain consistent flexural stiffness of the cable in service. The messenger cable other than
stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the recommendations of IS:4826
for heavily coated wires.
The damper mass shall be made of hot dip galvanised mild steel/cast iron or a permanent mould
cast zinc alloy. All castings shall be free from defects such as cracks, shrinkage, inclusions and
blow holes etc. The surface of the damper masses shall be smooth.
The damper clamp shall be casted over the messenger cable and offer sufficient and permanent
grip on it. The messenger cable shall not slip out of the grip at a load less than the mass pull-off
value of the damper. The damper masses made of material other-than zinc alloy shall be fixed
to the messenger cable in a suitable manner in order to avoid excessive stress concentration on
the messenger cables which shall cause premature fatigue failure of the same. The messenger
cable ends shall be suitably and effectively sealed to prevent corrosion. The damper mass made
of zinc alloy shall be casted over the messenger cable and have sufficient and permanent grip
on the messenger cable under all service conditions.
The contractor must indicate the clamp bolt tightening torque to ensure that the slip strength
of the clamp is maintained between 2.5 kN and 5 kN. The clamp when installed on the OPGW
cable shall not cause excessive stress concentration on the OPGW cable leading to permanent
deformation of the OPGW strands and premature fatigue failure in operation.
Section-02
Page 12 of 17

The vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper and dynamic characteristics of
the damper as detailed in Technical Specification, shall have to be submitted. The technical
particulars for vibration analysis and damping design of the system are as follows:
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description
Span Length in meters
(i) Ruling design span:
(ii) Maximum span:
(iii) Minimum Span:
Configuration:
Tensile load in each:
Armour rods used:
Technical Parameters
400 meters
1100 meters
100 meters
As per Specifications
As per sag tension calculations
Standard preformed armour
rods/AGS
Maximum permissible dynamic strain: +/- 150 micro strains
The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 100m to 1100m shall be submitted by the
Bidder. Placement charts should be duly supported with relevant technical documents and
sample calculations.
The damper placement charts shall include the following:
(1) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line tensions clearly
indicating the number of dampers to be installed per OPGW cable per span.
(2) Placement distances clearly identifying the extremities between which the distances are to
be measured.
(3) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension clamps (viz Free center
type/Armour grip type etc.)
(4) The influence of mid span compression joints, repair sleeves and armour rods (standard
and AGS) in the placement of dampers
2.1.3 Fibre Optic Splice Enclosures (Joint Box)
All splices shall be encased in Fibre Optic Splice Enclosures. Suitable splice enclosures shall be
provided to encase the optical cable splices in protective, moisture and dust free environment. Splice
enclosures shall comply to ingress protection class IP 66 or better. The splice enclosures shall be
designed for the storage and protection of required number of optical fibre splices and equipped with
sufficient number of splice trays for splicing all fibres in the cable. No more than 6 fibres shall be
terminated in a single splice tray. They shall be filled with suitable encapsulate that is easily removable
should re-entry be required into the enclosures.
Splice enclosures shall be suitable for outdoor use with each of the cable types provided under this
contract. Splice enclosures shall be appropriate for mounting on transmission line towers above anticlimb guard levels at about 10 metres from top of the tower and shall accommodate pass-through
splicing. The actual mounting height and location shall be finalised after Survey. Contractor shall be
responsible for splicing of fibres and installation of splice enclosures.
Section-02
Page 13 of 17

2.1.3.1 Optical Fibre Splices

Splicing of the optical fibre cabling shall be minimized through careful Contractor planning. There
shall be no mid-span splices allowed. All required splices shall be planned to occur on tower structures.
All optical fibre splicing shall comply with the following:
(a) All fibre splices shall be accomplished through fusion splicing.
(b) Each fibre splice shall be fitted with a splice protection sheath fitted over the final splice.
(c) All splices and bare fibre shall be neatly installed in covered splice trays. No more than six (6)
fibres shall be installed in each splice tray.
(d) For each link, bi-directional attenuation of single mode fusion splices, shall not average more
than 0.05 dB and no single splice loss shall exceed 0.1 dB when measured at 1550 nm.
(e) For splicing, fibre optic cable service loops of adequate length shall be provided so that all
splices occurring at tower structures can be performed at ground level.
2.1.4 Fibre Optic Approach Cables
For purposes of this specification, a fibre optic approach cable is defined as the Armoured underground
fibre optic cable required to connect Overhead Fibre Optic Cable (OPGW) between the final in line
splice enclosure on the gantry / tower forming the termination of the fibre cable on the power line and
the Fibre Optic Distribution Panel (FODP) installed within the building. The estimated fibre optic
approach cabling length requirements are indicated in the appendices. However, the Contractor shall
supply & install the optical fibre approach cable as required based on detailed site survey to be carried
out by the Contractor during the project execution and the Contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
2.1.4.1 Basic Construction
The cable shall be suitable for direct burial, laying in trenches & PVC/Hume ducts, laying under false
flooring and on indoor or outdoor cable raceways.
2.1.4.2 Jacket Construction & Material
The Approach Cable shall be a UV resistant, rodent proof, armoured cable with metallic type of
armouring. The outer cable jacket for approach cable shall consist of carbon black polyethylene resin to
prevent damage from exposure to ultra-violet light, weathering and high levels of pollution. The jacket
shall conform to ASTM D1248 for density.
2.1.4.3 Optical, Electrical and Mechanical Requirements
Approach cable shall contain fibres with identical optical/ physical characteristics as those in the
OPGW cables. The cable core shall comprise of tensile strength member(s), fibre support/bedding
structure, core wrap/bedding, and an overall impervious jacket.
Section-02
Page 14 of 17

2.1.5 Installation of Approach Cable

The existing cable trenches/ cable raceways proposed to be used shall be identified in the survey report.
The Contractor shall make its best effort to route the cable through the existing available cable
trenches. Where suitable existing cable trenches are not available, suitable alternatives shall be
provided after Employer approval. However, the approach cable shall be laid in the HDPE pipe in all
condition.
Suitable provisions shall be made by the Contractor to ensure adequate safety earthing and insulated
protection for the approach cable.
All required fittings, supports, accessories, ducts, inner ducts, conduits, risers and any item not
specially mentioned but required for laying and installation of approach cables shall be supplied and
installed by the Contractor.
2.1.6 Optical Fibre Termination and Splicing
Optical fibre terminations shall be installed in Fibre Optic Distribution Panels (FODP) designed to
provide protection for fibre splicing of preconnectorized pigtails and to accommodate connectorized
termination and coupling of the fibre cables. The Contractor shall provide rack /wall mounted Fibre
Optic Distribution Panels (FODPs) sized as indicated in the appendices and shall terminate the fibre
optic cabling up to the FODPs. The location of FODP rack shall be fixed by the Contractor, with the
Employers approval.
2.1.6.1 Fibre Optic Distribution Panel
At each location requiring the termination of at least one fibre within a cable, all fibres within that cable
shall be connectorized and terminated in Fibre Optic Distribution Panels in a manner consistent with
the following:
(a)
All fibre optic terminations shall be housed using FODPs provisioned with splice organizers and
splice trays. All fibres within a cable shall be fusion spliced to preconnectorized pigtails and
fitted to the "Back-side" of the provided fibre optic couplings.
(b)
FODPs shall be suitable for use with each of the cable types provided as part of this contract.
FODPs shall accommodate pass-through splicing and fibre terminations.
(c)
FODPs for indoor use shall be supplied in suitable cabinets/racks with locking arrangement
(d)
All FODPs shall be of corrosion resistant, robust construction and shall allow both top or
bottom entry for access to the splice trays. Ground lugs shall be provided on all FODPs and the
Contractor shall ensure that all FODPs are properly grounded. The FODP shall meet or exceed
ingress protection class IP55 specifications.
(e)
Flexible protection shall be provided to the patch cord bunches going out from FODP to other
equipment.
Section-02
Page 15 of 17

2.1.6.2 Optical Fibre Connectors

Optical fibres shall be connectorised with FC-PC type connectors preferably. Alternatively connector
with matching patch cord shall also be acceptable. Fibre optic couplings supplied with FODPs shall be
appropriate for the fibre connectors to be supported. There shall be no adapters.
2.1.7 Service Loops
For purposes of this specification, cable and fibre service loops are defined as slack (extra) cable and
fibre provided for facilitating the installation, maintenance and repair of the optical fibre cable plant.
(a) Outdoor Cable Service Loops: In-line splice enclosures installed outdoors and mounted on the
utility towers, shall be installed with sufficient fibre optic cable service loops such that the
recommended minimum bend radius is maintained while allowing for installation or maintenance
of the cable to be performed in a controlled environment at ground level.
(b) Indoor Cable Service Loops: FODPs shall provide at least three (3) metres of cable service loop.
Service loops shall be neatly secured and stored, coiled such that the minimum recommended bend
radius' are maintained.
(c) Fibre Units Service Loops: For all fibre optic cable splicing, the cable shall be stripped back a
sufficient length such that the fan-out of fibre units shall provide for at least one (1) metre of
fibre unit service loop between the stripped cable and the bare fibre fan-out.
(d) Pigtail Service Loops : Connectorised pigtails spliced to bare fibres shall provide at least 1 metre of
service loop installed in the FODP fibre organizer and at least one (1) metre of service loop to the
couplings neatly stored behind the FODP coupling panels.
(e) Fibre Service Loops : At least 0.5 metre of bare fibre service loop shall be provided on each side of
all fibre splices. The bare fibre service loops shall be neatly and safely installed inside covered
splice trays.
2.1.8 Methodology for Installation and Termination
All optical fibre cable termination, installation, stringing and handling plans, guides and procedures,
and engineering analysis (e.g. tension, sag, vibration etc.) shall be submitted to the Employer for review
and approval in the engineering/design phase of the project, prior to establishing the final cable lengths
for manufacture. Installation procedures including details of personnel and time required shall be
documented in detail and submitted to Employer for approval. All installation practices shall be field
proven and ISO accredited.
All cable segments shall include service loops as specified in this specifciation. The maximum
allowable stringing tension, maximum allowable torsional shear stress, crush strength and other
physical parameters of the cable shall not be exceeded. The preventative measures to be taken shall be
documented in detail and submitted to Employer in advance of installation.
Optical fibre attenuation shall be measured after installation and before splicing. Any increase in
attenuation or step discontinuity in attenuation shall not be acceptable and shall constitute a cable
Section-02
Page 16 of 17

segment failure. In the event of cable damage or any fibre damage, the complete section (tension
location to tension location) shall be replaced as mid-span joints are not acceptable.
Any or all additional steel work or modifications required to attach the fibre cabling to the overhead
transmission/ distribution line towers shall also be carried out by the Contractor. It shall be the
Contractors responsibility to provide adequate communications among all crew members and support
staff to ensure safe and successful installations.
2.1.9
Cable Raceways
To the extent possible, existing cable raceways shall be utilised. The Contractor is required to provide
and install any additional indoor cable raceways which may be required for proper implementation of
the fibre optic cabling system. This requirement shall be finalised during survey. The cable raceways
shall conform to the following:
(a) All cable raceways shall be sized to support full loading requirements plus at least a 200% safety
loading factor.
(b) Indoor cable raceways shall be fabricated from construction grade aluminium, galvanized iron or
anodized sheet metal or any other suitable material approved by the Employer. Suitable anticorrosion measures shall be provided. Steel fabricated raceways shall be finished inside and out,
treated to resist rust and to form a metal-to- paint bond.
(c) Mechanical construction drawings of the cable raceways shall be submitted for Employers
information & review.
------------------------------------------------End of this Section-----------------------------------------------
Section-02
Page 17 of 17

Section 3
Network Configuration and Equipment Characteristics
Index
3.1
Introduction -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
3.2
General Network Characteristics ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
3.2.1
Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
3.2.2
Functional Requirement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
3.2.3 General Systems Requirements ------------------------------------------------------------------ 5

3.2.3.1 System Synchronization -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
3.2.3.2 System Maintainability ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
3.2.3.3 System Upgradability and Expandability ----------------------------------------------------- 6
3.2.3.4 Equipment Availability ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
3.2.4 General Equipment Characteristics ------------------------------------------------------------- 7
3.2.4.1 Revision Levels and Modifications ------------------------------------------------------------ 7
3.2.4.2 Equipment Capacities ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
3.2.4.3 Redundancy Requirements and Protection Schemes ------------------------------------ 8
3.2.4.4 Lost Signal Recovery ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
3.2.4.5 Software Upgrades------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
3.2.5
General Site Considerations -------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
3.2.6
Proposed Optical Fiber Characteristics ----------------------------------------------------- 9
3.2.7
Fibre Optic Link Lengths ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
3.3
Fibre Optic Transmission System ------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
3.3.1
SDH Equipment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11
3.3.1.1
Functional Requirement -------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
3.3.1.2
Redundancy and Protection ---------------------------------------------------------------- 12
3.3.1.3
Service Channel ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12
3.3.1.4
Supervision and Alarms --------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
3.3.1.5
Synchronisation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
3.3.1.6
Electrical and Optical I/O Characteristics and General Parameters------------- 12
3.3.2 Optical Link Performance Requirements ----------------------------------------------------- 13
3.3.2.1
Link Budget Calculations -------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
3.3.2.2
Link Performance ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
3.3.2.3
FODP to SDH Equipment ------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
3.4
Termination Equipment Subsystem ----------------------------------------------------------------- 15
3.4.1
Functional Description --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
3.4.2 First Order (Primary) Multiplexing -------------------------------------------------------------- 16

3.4.2.1 Drop & Insert Primary Multiplexing ----------------------------------------------------------- 16
Section-03
Page 1 of 29

3.4.2.2
3.4.2.3
Channel Banks (Mux, Drop/Insert) ------------------------------------------------------- 16

Subscriber Line Units\Subscriber Line Interface Cards ---------------------------- 17
3.4.3 Digital Access Cross connect System -------------------------------------------------------- 17

3.4.3.1
Required DACS Applications -------------------------------------------------------------- 19
3.4.3.2
Menus and Reports -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
3.5
MDF, DDF and Cabling --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
3.5.1 MDF and DDF Patching Facilities ----------------------------------------------------------------- 20

3.5.1.1 Digital Distribution Frame Functional Requirements ------------------------------------ 20
3.5.1.2
Main Distribution Frames ------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
3.6
Patch Cords ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
3.7 Telecommunication Management Network / Network Management System -------------- 21

3.7.1
Applicable Standards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22
3.7.2
TMN Architecture ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
3.7.3 Management Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23

3.7.3.1
Configuration Management ---------------------------------------------------------------- 23
3.7.3.2
Fault Management ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
3.7.3.3
Performance Management ----------------------------------------------------------------- 24
3.7.3.4
Security Management ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 25
3.8
Communication Channel Requirement and Integration --------------------------------------- 26
3.9
Craft Terminal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
3.10
Hardware Requirements ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
3.10.1 Master Processor, Server/Workstation and Craft Terminal ----------------------------- 27

3.10.2 Peripherals and hardware -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
3.10.3 Local/Remote Operator Consoles ------------------------------------------------------------- 28
3.10.4 Power Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
3.11 General Software/Firmware Requirements ------------------------------------------------------- 28
3.11.1 Operating System Software ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
3.11.2 Applications Software ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
3.11.3 Software Utilities -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
3.11.4 Revisions, Upgrades, Maintainability------------------------------------------------------------ 28
3.11.5 Database(s) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 29
3.11.6 Help ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29
Section-03
Page 2 of 29

Section 3
Network Configuration and Equipment Characteristics
3.1
Introduction
This section describes the Fibre Optic Communication network configuration and the
equipment characteristics for communication system to be installed under the project.
The sub-systems addressed within this section are:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Fibre Optic Transmission System (FOTS)

Termination Equipment Subsystems
Network Management System(NMS)
MDF, DDF and Cabling
The requirements described herein are applicable to and in support of network

configurations depicted in Appendix and Network Management System (NMS) for
monitoring and control of this communication network. TMN and NMS have been
interchangeably used in this specification.
The security related requirements of the equipment shall be as per DoT (Department of
Telecommunication) guidelines and all similar security requirements as amended by DoT
on time to time basis shall be followed/complied by the vendor at no additional cost to
Employer till the implementation of the project.
The manufacturer shall allow the Employer and/or its designated agencies to inspect the
hardware, software, design, development, manufacturing,facility and supply chain and
subject all software to a security /threat check any time during the supplies of equipment
The contractor shall ensure that the supplied equipments have been got tested as per
relevant contemporary Indian or International Security Standards e.g. IT and IT related
elements against ISO/IEC 15408 standards, for Information Security Management System
against ISO 27000 series Standards, Telecom and Telecom related elements against
3GPP security standards, 3GPP2 security standards etc. from any international agency/
labs of the standards e.g. Common Criteria Labs in case of ISO/IEC 15408 standards until
31st March 2013. From 1st April, 2013, the certification shall be got done from authorized
and certified agency/lab in India.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the equipment supplied has all the contemporary
security related features and features related to communication security as prescribed
under relevant security standards. A list of features, equipments, software etc. supplied
and implemented in the project shall be given for use by the Employer
The contractor shall get the Employers network audited from security point of view once
a year from a network audit and certification agency as identified by DoT. The audit of
the network shall be carried once in a financial year till the maintenance service contract
Section-03
Page 3 of 29

in the bid. Network forensics, Network hardening, Network penetration test, Risk
assessment, Actions to fix problems and to prevent such problems from reoccurring etc.
shall be covered under network audit.
The Contractor shall ensure that all the documents, including software details are
supplied to the Employer in English language. A record of all the software updation and
changes shall be given to the Employer and any major updation and changes shall be
done with the prior approval of the Employer..
During maintenance period the Contractor shall keep a record of all operation and
maintenance procedure in the form of manual and shall also maintain a record of all
command logs (actual command given, who gave the command, time & date and from
where) for a period of 12 months. For next 24 months the same information shall be
stored/retained in a non-online mode. A list of all User ID linked with name and other
details of the user duly certified by the Employer shall also be maintained.
A record of all supply chains of the products (hardware/software) shall be given to the
Employer.
In case of any deliberate attempt for a security breach at the time of procurement or at a
later stage after deployment/installation of the equipment or during maintenance, liability
and criminal proceedings can be initiated against the Contractor as per guidelines of DoT
and any other Government department.
3.2
General Network Characteristics
3.2.1 Description
The proposed fibre optic communication network consists shall support the voice & data
communication requirements of RTUs, SCADA/EMS system and other Power System
operational requirements. The communication system shall provide data & voice connectivity
across the various locations or connectivity of RTUs with Control Centres. The RTUs located at
various locations will report to Control Center using IEC 60870-5-101 or IEC 60870-5-104
Protocol. The proposed communication system shall provide connectivity of some RTUs over
TCP/IP protocol using Ethernet interface and other RTUs over serial interface. The offered
communication System shall support the communication requirements of RTUs and the
SCADA/DMS system described in point to multi point and/or multipoint to multipoint
configurations using Ethernet over SDH.
The fibre optic network shall be based on Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) having
bit rate of STM-4. However, the offered equipment can be upgraded to STM-16 by
changing the optical card/interface only. The Contractor can propose a system based on
higher bit rate systems, if required, so as to meet the link budget requirements or any
other specification requirement. The detailed BOQ is described in appendices.
Section-03
Page 4 of 29

3.2.2 Functional Requirement

The primary function of the communication network is to provide a highly reliable voice
and data communication system in support of the SCADA/EMS. The communications
support requirement for SCADA/EMS system is for low & high speed data, express
voice circuits and administrative voice circuits as defined in appendices. A brief summary
of the communication system requirements is as follows:
(a)
High speed E1 channel support
(b)
64kbps & nx64kbps data channel support
(c)
Low speed (300 -1200 bps) data channel support
(d)
Voice (2 wires, 4 wires) channel support.
(e)
Data transport supporting Network Management channels
(f)
The connectivity envisaged between RTUs and Control Centre is Wide Area
Network (WAN) on TCP-IP using IEC 60870-5-104 protocol and IEC 60870-5101 protocol.
3.2.3
General Systems Requirements

Required characteristics are defined and specified herein at the system level, subsystem
level, and equipment level.
3.2.3.1 System Synchronization

At present the existing network, which is enclosed at Appendix A , is synchronized with
one master clock located at RLDC Shillong .
The Contractor shall synchronize the existing equipments and all the new equipments
under the contract using existing Master clock and slave clocks, as required. Contractor
shall provide the slave clocks as required under the set of clock indicated in BoQ. The
contractor shall submit the synchronization plan as per standard ITU-TG.811. All sync
equipments proposed under this contract should meet ITU-T G.811 criterion. The
holdover quality of slave clock shall meet ITU-T G.812 standard requirements.
The Contractor shall provide system wide synchronization fully distributed throughout
the telecom network and connected to all equipments new & existing. The system wide
synchronization shall be slaved to existing master clock as per details given above. The
Contractor shall submit the synchronization plan for the entire network meeting the
requirement of ITU-T G.803. The synchronization plan shall clearly indicate the
requirement of additional clock with full justification.
The system equipment requiring clock shall be connected to the master clock using
external clocking. For this purpose, appropriate interfaces(s) in the transmission &
Section-03
Page 5 of 29

termination equipment being supplied and all other associated hardware shall be provided
by the Contractor.
3.2.3.2 System Maintainability
To facilitate performance trending, efficient diagnosis and corrective resolution, the
system shall permit in-service diagnostic testing to be executed both locally and from
remote locations, manually and/or initiated under TMN control. Such testing shall not
affect the functional operation of the system.
Preventive and problem oriented maintenance of the communications system shall be
performed using diagnostics tools such as TMN and test equipment. They shall support
complete maintenance of all system elements and shall permit the diagnosis of any fault
without requiring additional test equipment. The Contractor shall provide specialized
training required to operate above mentioned diagnostic tools. For all redundant systems,
disconnection and repair of any failed device shall not interrupt the operation of the
system.
3.2.3.3 System Upgradability and Expandability
Equipment supplied shall be sized (though not necessarily equipped) to support system/
subsystem expansion to full capacity as provided by specified aggregate transmission
rates. Equipment units provisioned for equipped subunits shall be terminated at
appropriate patching facilities or termination blocks. Power supplies and TMN shall be
sized for maximum equipped system capacity.
3.2.3.4 Equipment Availability
The availability requirements is categorised in two parts. The Contractor shall ensure the
availability for subscriber to subscriber where they are providing the new equipments
(MUX/Drop-Insert) under this contract. The availability requirements are as follows,
which shall be demonstrated at site for the equipments being provided under this
contract:
A. New nodes with requirement of both SDH & Mux equipment
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Section-03
The availability of each fibre optic link (E1 to E1) shall be at least 99.999%.
The availability of network end to end (E1 to E1) shall be at least 99.998%.
The average per link subscriber to subscriber availability shall be at least 99.97%.
The per link subscriber to subscriber availability is defined as the availability
between any two data or voice subscribers between RTU to reporting Control
Centre and between control centres.
The network-wide subscriber to subscriber availability shall be atleast 99.8% .The
network-wide subscriber to subscriber availability is defined as the availability
between any two data or voice subscribers on the wideband network.
Page 6 of 29

B. New nodes with requirement of SDH equipment only

(1)
(2)
The availability of each fibre optic link (E1 to E1) shall be at least 99.999%.
The availability of network end to end (E1 to E1) shall be at least 99.998%.
The calculated availability is defined as the theoretical availability determined by a

statistical calculation based on the mean-time-between-failure (MTBF) and the meantime-to-repair (MTTR) of the components and subsystems comprising the FOTS. The
down time of the fibre optic cable shall not be considered in the aforesaid availability
calculations.
In order to ensure that the equipment & configuration proposed by the bidders shall be
capable of demonstrating the specified availability figures it is required that the Bidders
shall include in their proposal a calculated availability analysis for the proposed
equipment/ sub system. The calculated failure rates of the units and the calculated
availabilities of the equipment being offered shall be provided in the proposal. The
analysis shall be based on an availability block diagram and shall include the mean-timebetween failure (MTBF) and mean-time-to-repair (MTTR) of all of the components on
the link. The Contractor shall indicate in the analysis the MTBF and MTTR and the
resulting availability of each point-to-point link. For this analysis, an MTTR of at least 4
hours shall be assumed.
3.2.4 General Equipment Characteristics
All Contractor supplied equipment shall be new and of the finest production quality. The
Employer will not accept modules or printed-circuit boards that are modified by
appending wires or components. Wired strapping options shall be incorporated in the
board design to meet the above requirement.
All applicable requirements stated in this section shall equally apply to the TMN
equipment as specified in this Section.
3.2.4.1 Revision Levels and Modifications
All hardware, firmware and software delivered as part of the communications network
shall be field proven and at the most of current revision level. All modifications and
changes necessary to meet this requirement shall be completed prior to the start of the
factory tests or under special circumstances, on written approval by Employer, prior to
the completion of SAT.
All field modifications of the hardware, firmware and software that is required to meet
installation and/or performance specifications, shall be fully documented as part of the
deliverables, both as a separate field modifications record and as corrected
equipment/configuration documentation.
Section-03
Page 7 of 29

3.2.4.2 Equipment Capacities

Equipment supplied shall be sized and equipped with sufficient capacity to support BoQ
and configuration requirements as identified in the appendices. Each subsystem supplied
shall be sized (to be equipped as specified) to support full subsystem expansion.
Data communications channelization required to support the TMN subsystems specified
in Technical Specifications (TS) are not identified in the appendices. Therefore, the
Contractor is required to size and equip the system to include all channelization and
channel cards required to support the TMN function.
3.2.4.3 Redundancy Requirements and Protection Schemes
Equipment redundancy and Automatic Protection Schemes (APS) are specified in the
Table 3-1. The failure of one element shall not prevent the use of any other that has not
failed.
Table 3-1
Equipment Redundancy Requirements Summary
Fiber Optic transmission Equipment :
SDH equipment
Power Supply & Converters -----------------------------Common Control* Cards ----------------------------------DACS (Cross Connect)
Power Supply -------------------------------------------------Common control* cards------------------------------------MUX, DROP/INSERT
Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------
1:1 APS or distributed power

supply
1:1 APS

supply
1:1 APS

supply
* = Common control cards which are essentially

required for operation of the equipment.
The offered equipment shall support at least SNCP as per standard ITU-T G.841. In case
the equipment offered by the Bidder does not support the above mentioned minimum
protection methods, the bidder shall have to provide all additional equipment needed to
provide same level of flexibility, redundancy and functionality at no additional cost to
Employer. The bidders shall provide details of protection schemes supported in the Bid
document.
Section-03
Page 8 of 29

The offered equipment shall support automatic switchover function between the redundant
modules and all required modules and hardware to support the automatic switch over shall
be provided by the Contractor.
3.2.4.4 Lost Signal Recovery
At any digital signal level, reapplication of a lost signal shall result in automatic
resynchronization and full restoration to normal operation without manual intervention.
All alarms incident to the signal failure, shall be automatically cleared at the equipment,
rack and monitoring levels and normal operation indications restored and reported if
applicable.
3.2.4.5 Software Upgrades
The Contractor shall provide antivirus software along with all the computer
hardware/software which shall be upgraded periodically till the maintenance services
contract in the bid. Further, to meet all the specifications requirements during
implementation and maintenance, if upgrade in the hardware/software of supplied item is
required, the same shall be done by the contractor without any additional cost to the
Employer.
3.2.5
General Site Considerations

All fiber optic links up to 250 kms transmission line route length shall be implemented by
the Contractor without repeaters. In order to meet the link budget requirement, the
Contractor shall provide all the necessary equipments only in the end stations. The
contractor may provide the optical amplifier, wave length translator, optical cards or high
capacity SDH equipment with suitable rack/subrack to meet the maximum distance limit.
All the provided equipments shall be monitored by centralized NMS.
3.2.6
Proposed Optical Fibre Characteristics

The characteristics of the fibre(s) being installed are provided in the table 3-1(a):
Section-03
Page 9 of 29

Table 3-1(a)
DWSM Optical Fibre Characteristics
Fibre Description:
Dual-Window Single-Mode
Mode Field Diameter:
8.6 to 9.5 m ( 0.6m )
Cladding Diameter:
Core- Clad concentricity error
125.0 m 1 m
< 1.0m
< 0.6m
Mode field concentricity error

Cladding non-circularity
< 1%
Cable Cut-off Wavelength cc
< 1260 nm
1550 nm loss performance
As per G.652 D
0.69 Gpa
Proof Test Level

Attenuation Coefficient:
@1310nm < 0.35 dB/Km

@1550nm < 0.21 dB/Km
Chromatic Dispersion; Maximum:
18 ps/(nm x km) @ 1550 nm

3.5 ps/(nm x km) 1288-1339nm
5.3 ps/(nm x km) 1271-1360nm
Zero Dispersion Wavelength:

Zero Dispersion Slope:
Polarization mode dispersion
coefficient
1300 to 1324nm
0.092 ps/(nm2xkm) maximum
< 0.2 ps/km^1/2
Temperature Dependence:
Induced attenuation < 0.05 dB (-60 deg C - +85

deg C)
Bend Performance:
@ 1310 nm (752 mm dia Mandrel), 100 turns;

@ 1550 nm (301 mm radius, Mandrel), 100
turns; attenuation Rise 0.05 dB
@1550 nm(320.5 mm dia Mandrel, 1 turn;
3.2.7 Fibre Optic Link Lengths

The fiber optic route lengths are as specified in appendices. The lengths specified in
appendices are the transmission line route lengths; however the actual fiber cable length
shall exceed the route lengths on account of extra cable requirement due to sag, jointing
Section-03
Page 10 of 29

& splicing, approach cabling etc. For bidding purposes the Contractor may assume an
additional cable length of 5% of given route length + 1Km towards approach cable for
calculating the link length. The exact cable lengths shall be determined by the Contractor
during the survey. The same shall be used by the Contractor for final link design during
the detailed engineering of the project. In case of change in the specified BoQ, the
contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
3.3
Fibre Optic Transmission System

The Fibre Optic Transmission System (FOTS) is defined herein to include ETSI digital
optical line termination equipment. The FOTS shall be based on SDH technology.
Minimum aggregate bit rate shall be STM-4 and equipped with 2 nos. of minimum 16
port E1 interface(G.703) card & one no. of minimum 4 port Ethernet interface (IEEE
802.3/IEEE 802.3u) card supporting layer 2 switching as tributaries. The Ethernet
interfaces shall support VLAN (IEEE 802.1P/Q), spanning tree (IEEE 802.1D) quality of
service. . Protection scheme for Ethernet traffic should be ERPS based (Ethernet ring
protection scheme) as per ITU-T G.8032.
The Contractor shall provide (supply and install) connectorised jumpers (patch cords) for
FODP-to-equipment and equipment-to-equipment connection. Two number spare
jumpers shall be provided for each equipment connection. Fiber jumpers shall be of
sufficient lengths as to provide at least 0.5m of service loop when connected for their
intended purpose.
3.3.1 SDH Equipment

3.3.1.1 Functional Requirement
There is a requirement for different types of equipment under this project which are
described in this section. The BOQ is provided in the appendices. For the purpose of
BOQ, the SDH Equipment is considered to be divided in three parts i.e. Optical
Interface/SFP, Tributary Cards ( Electrical tributaries such as E1 & Ethernet 10/100 Mbps)
and Base Equipment (Consisting of Common Cards, Control cards, Optical base cards,
Power supply cards, sub-rack, cabinet, other hardware and accessories required for
installation of equipment i.e. everything besides optical interface/SFP and tributary cards).
If bidder is offering equipment with multifunction cards such as cross-connect or control
card with optical interface/SFP or tributary interface, such type of multifunction card shall
be considered as Common control card and shall be the part of base equipment. In case
optical interface/SFP is embedded with control card, the adequate number of optical
interface/SFPs shall be offered to meet the redundancy requirements of the specifications.
Further, control card shall not be equipped with more than one optical interface/SFP and
optical base card shall not be equipped with more than two optical interface/SFPs.
Section-03
Page 11 of 29

The equipment shall be configurable either as Terminal Multiplexer (TM) as well as

ADM with software settings only.
SDH ADM
The aggregate interfaces shall be (at least) STM-4 (622 Mbit/s) towards at least two directions
(Protected as specified in this specifications). At present the equipment shall be equipped with a
2 nos., min.16 E-1 port electrical tributary cards & one no., min.4 port Ethernet interface card as
tributaries. The Equipment shall provide access to full STM4 payload.
3.3.1.2 Redundancy and Protection
Two fibre rings shall be implemented wherever the network permits. On linear sections of
the network, protected links using 4 fibres shall be implemented.
3.3.1.3 Service Channel
Service channels shall be provided as a function of the SDH equipment and shall be
equipped with Service Channel Muldems that shall provide at a minimum: One voice
channel (order wire) with analog interface (0.3 to 3.4 kHz) and one data channel. Both
omnibus and selective calling facilities shall be provided. There shall be a facility to
extend the line system order-wire to any other system or exchange lines on 2W/4W basis.
3.3.1.4 Supervision and Alarms
ISM (In Service Monitoring) circuitry shall be provided as a function of the SDH
equipment. Local visual alarm indicators shall be provided on the equipment, as a rack
summary alarm panel. Alarms shall be as per ITU-T Standards G.774, G.783 and G.784.
Additionally, F2/Q2 interfaces for a local craftsperson terminal interface and remote
equipment monitoring is required.
The Equipment shall support collection of at least four (4) external alarms for monitoring
and control of station associated devices by the TMN.
3.3.1.5 Synchronisation
The equipment shall provide synchronisation as per Table 3-2.
synchronisation output from each equipment shall be provided.
One 2MHz
3.3.1.6 Electrical and Optical I/O Characteristics and General Parameters

Table 3-2 provides the electrical and optical characteristics as well as other general
parameters for SDH equipment.
Section-03
Page 12 of 29

Table 3-2
Electrical and Optical I/O Characteristics and General Parameters
Optical Wavelength NOTE (1)
1310/1550nm
Optical Source NOTE (2)
Laser
Optical Source Lifespan
Better than 5 X105 hours
Optical Fibre Type
G.652 D
Optical Connectors
Type FC-PC
Transmission Quality
Per ITU-T G.821, G.823, G.826
Source Primary Power
-48 Vdc
Equipment Specifications
Per ITU-T G.783
Tributary, Electrical Interface

Ethernet Interface
Per ITU-T G.703, 75

10/100 Mbps
SDH Bit Rates
Per ITU-T G.703
Optical Interfaces
Per ITU-T G.957, G.958
Frame and Multiplexing Structure for

SDH
Per ITU-T G.707
Synchronization
Per ITU-T G.813
Management Functions
Per ITU-T G.774, G.784
Protection Architectures
Per ITU-T G.841
Per ITU-T G.774, G.783, G.784

Built In Testing and Alarms
NOTE (1) Optical wavelength shall be selected considering the characteristics of the
optical fibre and the link budget.
NOTE (2) Eye Safety for Laser Equipment: To avoid eye damage, when a receiver
detects a line interruption, it is required that the optical power of the laser
shall be reduced to safe limits on the transmitter in the opposite direction as
per ITU-T G.958.
NOTE (3) In case other than FC-PC connector is provided in the equipment suitable
patch cord with matching connectors are to be provided to connect with
FODP.
3.3.2 Optical Link Performance Requirements
The optical fibre link performance requirements are specified as follows:
3.3.2.1
Link Budget Calculations
The fibre optic link budget calculations shall be calculated based upon the following
Section-03
Page 13 of 29

criteria:
(1) Fibre attenuation: The fibre attenuation shall be taken to be the guaranteed maximum
fibre attenuation i.e. 0.21 dB/Km @1550nm and 0.35 dB/km @1310nm.
(2) Splice loss: Minimum 0.05 dB per splice. One splice shall be considered for every 3
kms.
(3) Connector losses: Losses due to connectors shall be considered to be minimum 1.0 dB
per link.
(4) Equipment Parameters: The equipment parameters to be considered for link budget
calculations shall be the guaranteed End of Life (EOL) parameters. In case, the End of
Life parameters are not specified for the SDH equipment, an End of Life Margin of at
least 2 dB shall be considered and a similar margin shall be considered for optical
amplifiers.
(5) Optical path Penalty : An optical path penalty of at least 1 dB shall be considered to
account for total degradations due to reflections, inter symbol interference, mode partition
noise and laser chirp.
(6) Maintenance Margin: A maintenance margin of at least 2.5 dB/100Km shall be kept
towards cabling, repair splicing, cable ageing and temperature variations etc.
(7) Other losses: Other losses, if any required specifically for system to be supplied shall
also be suitably considered.
(8) Dispersion: The fibre dispersion shall be taken to be the guaranteed maximum
dispersion i.e. 18 ps/nm.Km @1550 nm & 6 ps/nm.km @ 1310 nm for DWSM fibres.
(9) Bit Error Rate: The link budget calculations shall be done for a BER of 10-10.
The bidders shall determine the total link loss based on the above parameters and shall
submit the system design (including link budget calculations) for each category of fibre
optic link during detailed Engineering.
For finalising the FOTS system design & BOQ, above methodology shall be adopted
taking into account fibre attenuation, dispersion and splice loss determined during the
detailed engineering. Accordingly, additions and deletions from the contract shall be
carried out based on unit rates indicated in the contract.
Section-03
Page 14 of 29

3.3.2.2
Link Performance
The Link performance for ES, SES and BER for the fibre optic links shall correspond to National
Network as defined in ITU-T G.826.
3.3.2.3 FODP to SDH Equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible for connectivity between the FODP and the SDH equipment.
The Contractor shall provide FC PC coupled patch cords. The location of FODP shall be
finalized during survey.
The patch-cord length between the FODP & equipment rack shall be suitably protected from
rodents, abrasion, crush or mechanical damage.
3.4 Termination Equipment Subsystem
The Termination Equipment Subsystem is defined to include the equipment that interfaces
(adapts) the subscriber (user) to the Fibre Optic Transmission System (FOTS). A Functional
description of these equipments are as follows:
3.4.1 Functional Description
The transmission network node provides subscriber interface to the transmission network and/or
switching/routing. For clarity, the basic functions accomplished at the network nodal points, are
described briefly as follows:
Primary Multiplexer shall be used to accomplish subscriber connectivity to the Digital
Communication Network. Subscriber Line Units shall provide analog to digital and direct digital
conversion to 64 Kbps digital channel. In the CEPT standard hierarchy, thirty (30) such 64 Kbps
digital channels shall be Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) resulting in a single 2.048 Mbps (E1) digital bit stream.
Digital Drop-Insert and Branching Equipment shall be used to digitally interface a small number
of channels at spur locations without requiring successive D/A and A/D conversions of the
throughput channels.
Digital Cross connect Equipment (DACS) shall be used to provide software controlled dynamic
routing/rerouting of the primary (E-1) bit stream as well as the 30 channels of the E1 bit stream.
The equipment shall also have an interface for external 2048 kHz synchronisation signal
according to ITU-T Recommendation G.703
Section-03
Page 15 of 29

3.4.2 First Order (Primary) Multiplexing

The Contractor shall be required to provide E-1 Drop & Insert Multiplexer and E-1 Channel
Bank primary multiplexing in compliance with the electrical input-output characteristics
provided in Table 3-3.
3.4.2.1 Drop & Insert Primary Multiplexing
Drop & Insert primary multiplexing in conformance with CEPT E-1 characteristics shall be
required at locations where the subscriber requirement is minimal. The drop and insertion of up
to thirty 64 Kbps channels supporting subscriber line units (SLU) shall be required at
intermediate locations. The Drop & Insert Muxes supplied shall be performance and card
compatible with the Channel Bank Equipment provided so that all Subscriber Line Interface
cards are interchangeable.
Table 3-3
CEPT E-1 Standard First Order Multiplexing
Electrical Input/Output Characteristics
Applicable Standards:
CEPT per CCITT Recommendation G.702, G.703,

G.711 and G.712
Number of Tributaries:
30 X 64 Kbps
Alternative
Tributaries:
n X 64 Kbps V.36
64Kb/s V.11/V.36
Sub-rate
Output Aggregate Rate:

Interface Code:
Impedance:
Peak Level @ 120 ohm:
Maximum Insertion Loss:
2.048 Mb/s 50 ppm

HDB3
75 ohm unbalanced
3.0 volts 10%
2.37 volts 10%
6 db
Signal Waveform:
Frame Structure:
Jitter Performance:
Per CCITT G.703

Per CCITT G.742
Per CCITT G.823
Power Supply Voltage:
-48 vdc
3.4.2.2 Channel Banks (Mux, Drop/Insert)

User voice and data equipment interfacing requirements are defined at the subscriber line level.
Primary multiplexing in conformance with CEPT E-1 characteristics shall be used to provide
first order multiplexing of up to thirty 64 Kbps channels supporting Subscriber Line Units
(SLUs).
Section-03
Page 16 of 29

3.4.2.3 Subscriber Line Units\Subscriber Line Interface Cards

The terms Subscriber Line Interface Cards and Subscriber Line Units have been used
interchangeably throughout the specification. Multiple configurations of SLUs shall be required
to provide subscriber to primary multiplexer Bank interfacing for a variety of voice and data
communications. In case there are changes in number or type of cards because of changes in
channel requirements, the contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
The SLU interface requirements are discussed in the following subparagraphs:
(A)
Voice Channels
The voice channel requirement is for (I) 4-Wire E&M trunking in support of PABX trunks
& PLC VF and (II) 2-Wire telephonic interfaces. 2 wire SLUs shall be DTMF/TP optioned
for 2-wire loop start or 2-wire GND start. The voice cards shall utilize ITU.T A - law
companded PCM G.711, 64 kbits/s encoding. The voice card requirements are indicated in
the BoQ in appendices.
(B)
Sub-Channel Data Multiplexing
For this Project, the RTU data interface to the wideband telecommunications network node
shall be defined at the DTE level at low-speed rates of 300, 600 and 1200 baud. The
Contractor shall be required to furnish 64 Kbps SLU asynchronous dataplexing for at least
4 selectable low speed DTE interfaces whenever multiple asynchronous data circuits are
required.
(C)
Synchronous Data
The Contractor shall provide a direct DTE interface for synchronous communications at
speed of 64Kbps and compatible with CCITT G.703 Kbit/s, V.35 and X.21 interfaces.
Data rate selection shall be switch selectable or programmable.
(D) Nx64 kbps Synchronous Data
There is also a requirement for N x 64 kbps V.35, X.21 interfaces. The tentative quantities
have been identified in the appendices. However the final BOQ shall be worked out during
detailed design and contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
3.4.3 Digital Access Cross connect System
The Contractor shall be required to provide Digital Access Cross connect Systems (DACS)
capable of switching 16 or more E-1 lines in compliance with the electrical input-output
Section-03
Page 17 of 29

characteristics provided in Table 2-4. DACSs shall be fully compatible with CEPT E-1 tributary
standards.
DACSs shall be provided at locations specified in the appendices and shall be used to establish
and reconfigure cross-connections at the tributary level of up to 480 x 64Kb/s channels. DACS E1 line interface shall be fully capable of accessing each E-1 line.
Within the context of this specification, sizing of DACS system is defined as 4 x n where n is the
maximum size of the port switching matrix. Thus a DACS sized as 8 x 16 means that 8 E1 ports
are interfaced over a 16 port (E1) matrix.
A DACS system shall consist of the switch matrix, all routing logic and timing circuitry for
internally sourced, line derived or externally supplied network timing and full software support.
The DACSs to be provided under this contract shall consist of at least a 16 port switching matrix,
with 16 ports equipped, i.e. 16 X 16 size. The DACS shall also be able to switch the signalling of
the voice channels along with the voice channels. The DACS shall not use, decrease or block the
specified capacity of the switching matrix while switching the signalling. The DACS shall
support the Channel Associated Signallling (CAS) and Common Channel Signalling (CCS) both
as per ITU-T G. 704.
The DACS shall provide user friendly control and management software. The user shall be able
to operate the DACS locally through craft terminal, via an RS-232 interface or remotely under
TMN supervisory control.
Table 3-4
CEPT E-1 Digital Access Cross Connect System
Required Operating Characteristics
E-1 Trunk Capacity:
Minimum 16-Port Switch Matrix

Minimum 4-Port I/O per card
Tributary Capacity:
30 X 64 Kbps
Compatibility:
CEPT E-1, CEPT E-1 tributary channel
Frame Delay:
Minimum < 1 frame

Maximum < 2 frames
E-1 Port Interface:

Interface Code:
Impedance:
Maximum Insertion Loss:
2.048 Mb/s 50 ppm

HDB3
75 ohm unbalanced
2.37 volts 10%
6 db
Signal Waveform:
Per CCITT G.703
Section-03
Page 18 of 29

Table 3-4
CEPT E-1 Digital Access Cross Connect System
Required Operating Characteristics
Per CCITT G.742
Frame Structure:
Per CCITT G.823
Jitter Performance:
Synchronisation:
Internal, external source and synchronized on incoming

E-1
Routing:
Routing Table Capacity:
Fully non-blocking tributary to/from E-1 channel

Minimum of 9 routing tables for reconfiguration
Supervisory Ports:
Supervisory Port Interface:
Interface:
Serial Com Ports

RS-232
Standard ASCII ANSI compatible terminal
Supervisory Channel:
Async data rates, software selectable:

speed of 110-9600 bps, odd or even parity
7 or 8 bits.
Power Supply Voltage:
-48 VDC
3.4.3.1
Required DACS Applications
The DACS provided shall be fully capable of implementing standard applications such as
"Groom and Fill", Drop & Insert/Bypass, Broadcast and Alternative Routing.
3.4.3.2
Menus and Reports
DACSs throughout the network shall be required to function as fully integrated subsystems of the
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN).
The DACS software shall provide menu driven management of DACS and shall provide at least
the following:
(I)
Active Configuration:
configuration.
The user shall be able to modify the current active
(II)
Configuration : The configurations other than the active one shall be listed, edited,
viewed, renamed, deleted and activated . Actions shall be allowed manually, upon a
carrier failure or specified alarm condition, remotely or on a scheduled basis.
(III) Reports : The user shall have selection of pre formatted specific reports and "Report
Options" to be used to select where the next reports will be sent.
Section-03
Page 19 of 29

(IV) Administration: This shall provide the user, options to control, view and maintain
various logs and the DACS software.
(V)
3.5
Alarms: This shall display Alarm Status on all active ports and shall have an alert
mechanism that readily identifies an alarm event to the user through TMN (locally
as well as remotely). The alarms shall have different colours based on the
importance of the alarm.
MDF, DDF and Cabling
For the purposes of the specification, the contractor shall provide cabling, wiring, DDF patching
facilities and MDFs interfacing to the wideband telecommunications system. Equipment and
material components for MDF, DDF and cabling are also part of this procurement. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to provide all cable support required for full supplied equipment
interconnection with the MDF and shall be in accordance with communications industry standard
practices and the requirements mentioned in the technical specifications.
3.5.1 MDF and DDF Patching Facilities
The Contractor shall supply and install all cabling, wiring, connectors, cross connects, Digital
Distribution Frames (DDF) and Main Distribution Frames (MDF) associated with the installation
and interconnection of equipments procured under this package as follows:
(i)
(ii)
DDFs for termination of new SDH equipment E-1 ports

Cabling (including connectors) for E1 level connections from DDF to existing SDH
equipments, DDF to Existing & new PDH equipments. To the extent possible, existing
cable at site shall be used.
(iii) All Ethernet ports shall be terminated with RJ-45 connector. Provision for 100%
expansion with connector for terminating additional Ethernet ports shall be provided.
(iv) MDFs for termination of all the subscriber channels at new PDH node
(v) Cabling and connectors required to enable subscriber-to-subscriber circuits over the
telecom network. The Line side of the MDF shall be cabled to the Primary Multiplex and
the equipment side shall be cabled to the MDF of the assigned subscriber (PLCC, PABX,
Telephone at wideband locations etc).
(vi) Any other cables, connections etc required for a fully functional, integrated telecom
system.
The connections amongst various equipment such as FOTS, termination equipment and
subscriber MDFs etc shall always be routed through DDF and MDF to provide maintenance
access.
3.5.1.1 Digital Distribution Frame Functional Requirements
The Contractor shall provide DDF for Digital Signal Cross connect (DSX) Broadband-quality
Section-03
Page 20 of 29

(better than 20 MHz) patching facilities configured "normally-thru" with Equipment, Line and
Monitor Patch Jacks. DDFs shall provide the following basic functions:
(i)
"Normally thru" circuit routing
(ii) Circuit rerouting via patch cord assemblies
(iii) Circuit disconnect and termination
All DDFs shall be sized and equipped to support the offered configuration of the provided
equipment. Independent Transmit and Receive patch jack assemblies (line and equipment) shall
provide for separate transmit and receive single-plug patching. Transmit and receive patch jack
assemblies shall be located side-by-side such that dual-plug patch cord assemblies may be used to
route both transmit and receive for the same circuit.
3.5.1.2
Main Distribution Frames
The Contractor shall make provision for cross connection of subscriber services to the
subscribers utilizing Krone type or equivalent and shall provide full connectivity up to and
terminated on the equipment side of the appropriate DDFs and line side of MDFs. The Contractor
shall terminate on the equipment side of patching facilities provided by other contracts and shall
provide DSX type patching facilities supporting aggregate bit streams (i.e. dataplexers and E-1
Channel Banks). Separate Patch panels or MDFs shall be provided for Data and Voice. All cross
connects shall be accomplished utilizing one, two or three pair patch cords. Patch plugs are
permissible for direct one-to-one circuit "cut-thru".
3.6
Patch Cords
The Contractor has to supply FC PC coupled Patch cords as described in BOQ. The Patch cord
return loss shall be equal to or better than 40 dB and insertion loss equal to or less than 0.5 dB.
3.7 Telecommunication Management Network / Network Management System
The Contractor shall provide a Telecommunications Management Network System (TMN) for
operational support to the FOTS and associated Termination equipment subsystems. This TMN
shall provide the capability to monitor, reconfigure, and control elements of the
telecommunications network from a centralized location and at each node of the network where
equipment is located. This TMN system shall assist Employer/Owner in the operations and
maintenance of the wideband communication resources of the including detection of degraded
circuits, system performance, the diagnosis of problems, the implementation of remedial actions
and the allocation or reallocation of telecommunications resources and addition/deletion of
network elements.
The contractor shall supply preferably a single TMN for all the NEs (Network Elements) such as
SDH equipment, Mux, Drop-Insert, DACS etc. In case a single TMN can not be provided for all
the NEs, the contractor may supply separate TMNs. Each of the offered TMN shall meet the
Section-03
Page 21 of 29

requirements indicated in this section. The bidder shall provide details of the offered TMN in the
bid.
3.7.1 Applicable Standards
The TMN design concept, functional and informational architecture and physical architecture,
shall be in compliance with ITU-T Recommendation M.3010.
3.7.2 TMN Architecture
The TMN shall provide
a.
Collection of Management data from all Network Elements (NEs) supplied under this
package. The minimum monitoring and control requirements for the communication
equipment shall be as defined in this section.
b.
Processing of above management data by using processor(s) located at control Centre and
additional intermediate station processor(s), wherever required.
c.
Monitoring and control of the NEs as defined below:
d.
I)
TMN system at RLDC (including local operator console) shall support management
of all equipments supplied under Central Sector System and monitoring of the
entire regional network supplied under this package. At a minimum functions of
Network management layer (NML) and Element management layer (EML) as
defined in CCITT M3010. The detailed functions are listed in TS.
II)
TMN remote sub-system (including remote operator console) at all the SLDCs shall
support management of all equipments supplied under the respective Constituents
in this package.
III)
Monitoring and control of NEs using Craft Terminals as defined in this Section .
Supervisory monitoring and control of the following station associated devices:

I)
II)
III)
IV)
e.
Intrusion Detection Alarms

Power Failure
Fire and Smoke Detection
Environmental Control (Temperature, Humidity etc.)
Communication channel support for TMN System as specified in Technical Specifications

(TS).
The supplied TMN system shall be capable of handling all management functions for at least
150% of the final network elements. Further, the centralised TMN system shall also have
provision for addition of at least two remote operator consoles. The TMN hardware shall be so
designed that failure of a single processor/component (router, switch, converter etc.) shall not
Section-03
Page 22 of 29

inhibit any of the functionality of the TMN at control centre. The Contractor shall submit for
Employers approval the TMN architecture describing in detail the following
subsystems/features:
f.
i.
Database used in TMN
ii.
Master Processor, server/workstation, LAN, Peripherals and hardware
iii.
Software and operating system
iv.
Local Consoles/remote consoles
v.
Craft Terminals
vi.
Data communication between NEs, Remote/Local Consoles and TMN Processor(s)
vii.
Routers/Bridges
viii. Expansion Capabilities

The offered TMN system shall be capable of integration to other suppliers Network
Management System (NMS) upwardly through SNMP North bound interface.The interface
shall accommodate all required functionalities to implement OSS but not limited to the
following:
a.
Real time forwarding and synchronization
b.
Provisioning of circuits
c.
Upload of network topology
d.
Monitoring of events for topology and circuit changes
e.
Alarm handling
The details shall be finalised and discussed during detailed engineering and the Contractor shall
be obliged to provide/share all necessary information and co-ordinate with the implementation
vendor of OSS.
3.7.3 Management Functions
The TMN shall support following Management functions:
3.7.3.1
Configuration Management
Configuration management is concerned with management, display, and control of the network
configuration. Minimum specific requirements that shall be satisfied include the following:
a.
Provide tools to establish and maintain the backbone topology and configuration
information and provide graphical maps depicting the configurations.
b.
Gather descriptive information about the current configuration of the equipment,

provide operator displays, and prepare reports.
Section-03
Page 23 of 29

c.
Provide tools for planning, establishing, and changing the static equipment
configuration. Provide for changes to the equipment configuration in response to
equipment failures, planned upgrades, and operator requests to take equipment
offline for testing.
d.
Provide verification testing to support new equipment installation.
3.7.3.2
Fault Management
Fault management is concerned with detecting, diagnosing, bypassing, directing service

restoration, and reporting on all the backbone network equipment, systems, and links. Minimum
specific requirements that shall be satisfied include the following:
a.
Display equipment status in a consistent fashion regardless of the source of the data
on a graphical topological, map-type display. Status shall be displayed through the
use of colours on links and nodes as well as through text.
b.
Obtain status and detect faults through periodic polling, processing of unsolicited
alarms and error events, and periodic testing for connectivity.
c.
Maintain an alarm summary of unacknowledged alarm events on the management

station display and maintain a log of all received alarms. The operator shall be able
to acknowledge and clear alarms individually and as a group. The use of alarm
correlation techniques is encouraged to minimize the proliferation of alarms caused
by a single, common event. All alarms shall be configurable as critical alarms, major
alarms and minor alarms with different colours.
d.
Provide the capability to diagnose and isolate failures through analysis of error and
event reports and through the use of both on-line and off-line diagnostic tests and
display of monitored data.
e.
The criteria for fail over shall be configurable as automatic fail over to redundant
equipment wherever possible and through operator-initiated actions where automatic
fail over is not possible. The status of fail over shall be reported to the NMS.
f.
Track network equipment failure history.
3.7.3.3
Performance Management
Performance management is concerned with evaluation of the use of network equipments and
their capability to meet performance objectives. Minimum specific requirements that shall be
satisfied include the following:
a.
Section-03
Provide support for an operator to initiate, collect, and terminate performance

metrics under both normal and degraded conditions. For example, BER of each
Page 24 of 29

link, together with other data measured at each node, shall be available on operator
request.
b.
3.7.3.4
Monitor point to point & end to end signal quality and history. Provide operator
controls to monitor performance of specified events, measures, and resources.
Specifically provide displays to permit the operator to:
1.
Select/deselect network equipments, events, and threshold parameters to

monitor
2.
Set monitoring start time and duration or end time
3.
Set monitoring sampling frequency
4.
Set/change threshold values on selected performance parameters
5.
Generate alarm events when thresholds are exceeded.
6.
Set multiple thresholds on certain performance parameters. Alarm categories

include as a minimum a warning and a failure.
7.
Calculate selected statistical data to measure performance on selected

equipment based on both current and historical performance data maintained
in performance logs. Performance data provided is limited to what is
available from the equipment Contractors.
8.
Provide graphical displays of point to point and end to end current

performance parameter values. Provide tabular displays of current, peak, and
average values for performance parameters.
9.
Generate reports on a daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly basis containing

system statistics.
Security Management
The TMN shall be provided with security features to limit access to monitoring and control
capabilities to only authorized personnel. One access level of System Administrator and at least
two levels of operator access shall be provided - read (view) only, and write (configure). The
system administrator shall be able to create, define and modify operators with different access
levels, network domains and perform all kind of maintenance and up gradation of the TMN
system. With "read only" access level, network parameters should only be viewed. Access to
database maintenance, command control and test functions shall be available with "write " access
level. Means shall be provided to ensure only one authorized user has write capability for a
selected domain of the network. It shall be possible to define multiple domains for purposes of
monitoring and control.
Section-03
Page 25 of 29

Human error and conflict detection are also required. Such errors and access violations shall be
reported to the offending user as error messages and warnings.
3.8
Communication Channel Requirement and Integration
Communication requirements for TMN system have not been considered in Appendices and the
Contractor shall provide these as a part of TMN system. The Contractor shall provide all required
interface cards / devices, LAN, routers/bridges, channel routing, cabling, wiring etc. and
interfacing required for full TMN data transport.
The TMN data transport shall utilize the wideband communications transmission system service
channel in the overhead whenever possible. This will provide inherent critical path protection
Should the configuration requirements dictate multiple TMN station processors, the TMN Master
Station shall require bidirectional data transport with its station processor(s). This
communications interfacing shall be via critically protected data channels. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to provide for and equip all necessary critically protected TMN data
channel support.
In case supervisory channels are not available, the Contractor shall provide suitable interfaces in
their supplied equipment for transport of TMN data. The Contractor shall also be responsible for
providing suitable channels with appropriate interfaces to transport the TMN data.
The NMS information of existing PDH & SDH system shall be transported through the new
communication network, wherever required, up to the NMS location. The NMS information of
the new SDH & PDH system being procured under the package shall be transported through the
existing communication network using 64 kbps/2Mpbs (G.703) interfaces. Any hardware
required for above interfacing shall be provided by the Contractor.
The bidders shall describe in the proposal the TMN data transport proposed to be used by the
bidder in detail including capacity requirements and various components/equipment proposed to
be used.
3.9
Craft Terminal
Each equipment (SDH equipment, Mux, Drop/Insert and DACS etc.) on the fibre optic
communication network shall include provision for connecting a portable personal computer
(PC) to be known as craft terminal to support local commissioning and maintenance activities.
Through the use of this PC and local displays/controls, the operator shall be able to:
a.
b.
c.
Section-03
Change the configuration of the station & the connected NEs.

Perform tests
Get detailed fault information
Page 26 of 29

The craft terminal shall be connected to the interface available in the communication equipment.
Portable (laptop) computers (Craft terminals), each complete with necessary system and
application software to support the functions listed above, shall be supplied to the employer as
per BOQ given in the appendices.
3.10
Hardware Requirements
3.10.1 Master Processor, Server/Workstation and Craft Terminal

The server/workstation and craft terminal shall have suitable processor(s) which shall be
sufficient to meet all the functional requirement and expansion capabilities stipulated in this
specification. Only reputed make like Dell, IBM, HP, Compaq make shall be supplied.
The server shall have minimum configuration of 3GHz for CISC based or 1.6GHz for RISC
based processor, 2GB RAM, DVD-ROM drive, redundant 80 GB internal Hard Disk Drive,
101-Enhanced style keyboards, mouse, parallel, serial, USB(2.0) ports and hot swap redundant
power supply. VDUs shall be 17" TFT active matrix color LCD with a minimum resolution of
1024 X 768. Appropriate network drive card shall also be provided wherever required.
However, the internal hard disk drive for the server shall be redundant and all the data shall be
mirrored. Further, the TMN software shall support data mirroring on redundant disk drives.
The workstation shall have minimum configuration of 2.4GHz for CISC or 1.4GHz for RISC
based processor, 1GB RAM, DVD-RW drive, 160 GB Hard Disk Drive, 101-Enhanced style
keyboards, mouse, parallel, serial and USB (2.0) ports. VDUs shall be 19" TFT active matrix
color LCD with a minimum resolution of 1024 X 768. Appropriate network drive card shall also
be provided wherever required.
CPU enclosures shall be desktop type and shall include available expansion slots except for the
Craft Terminal which shall be a laptop. The craft terminal shall have minimum configuration of
2.4 GHz, 2 GB RAM, 256 MB VRAM, DVD RW drive, 160 GB Hard Disk Drive, keyboard,
mouse/trackball etc., parallel, serial/USB (2.0) ports to accommodate printers, and
Internal/external Data/Fax modem and a battery back-up of at least 60 minutes. VDUs shall be
15" TFT active matrix color LCD with a minimum resolution of 1024 X 768.
3.10.2 Peripherals and hardware

TMN system shall be provided with laser printer. The laser printer shall have a minimum print
speed of 17 pages per minute and a minimum resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi. The laser printer
shall have parallel and LAN ports for connecting to TMN system.
The laser printer under this specification shall be black & white and include print enhanced
buffering to prevent loss of print data in the event of a print failure.
Section-03
Page 27 of 29

3.10.3 Local/Remote Operator Consoles

The Contractor shall provide operator consoles sized and equipped to support the subsystem(s)
furnished and in compliance with the specification. The console shall provide hardware
interfacing for the TMN users to the software operating support systems. At a minimum, a
console shall include the hardware similar to a workstation.
3.10.4 Power Supplies
The TMN system shall use 220 volts 50 Hz A.C or -48 volt D.C as available at site for its
operation as available at site.
3.11 General Software/Firmware Requirements
Due to various alternative design approaches, it is neither intended nor possible to specify all
software and firmware characteristics. It is the intent herein to provide design boundaries and
guidelines that help to ensure a demonstrated, integrated program package that is maintainable
and meets both hardware systems requirements and the customer's operational requirements.
3.11.1 Operating System Software
Operating system software shall be provided to control the execution of system programs,
application programs, management devices, to allocate system resources, and manage
communications among the system processors. The contractor shall make no modifications to the
OEM's operating system, except as provided as USER installation parameters.
3.11.2 Applications Software
All applications software shall be written in a high-level programming language unless developed
using industry proven application programs and development tools provided with the system. The
contractor shall make no modifications to the applications program except as provided as USER
development tools.
3.11.3 Software Utilities
A utility shall be provided to convert all reports into standard PC application formats such as
excel.
3.11.4 Revisions, Upgrades, Maintainability
All firmware and software delivered under this specification shall be the latest field proven
version available at the time of contract approval. Installed demonstration for acceptance shall be
required. All firmware provided shall support its fully equipped intended functional requirements
without additional rewrite or programming.
Section-03
Page 28 of 29

All software shall be easily user expandable to accommodate the anticipated system growth, as
defined in this specification. Reassembly recompilation or revision upgrades of the software or
components of the software, shall not be necessary to accommodate full system expansion.
Software provided shall be compliant with national and international industry standards.
3.11.5 Database(s)
The contractor shall develop all the databases for final wideband network following the global
acronyms for all stations. Database(s) to be provided shall contain all structure definitions and
data for the integrated functional requirements of TMN system.
TMN operator Groups shall share the same virtual database. This means that they shall share the
same database and database manager, whether or not physically separate databases are
maintained.
3.11.6 Help
All applications shall be supported by USER accessible HELP commands that shall assist the
user in the performance of its tasks. HELP commands for an application shall be available to the
user from within the active application and shall not interfere with the activities of the
application.
---------------------------------------------------End of the Section------------------------------------
Section-03
Page 29 of 29

Section-04
DC Power Supply System
Index
4.1 General Technical Requirements for SMPS based DC power supply units..4
4.1.1 Operational/Component Requirements.......................................................... 4
4.1.2 Wiring............................................................................................................ 5
4.1.3 Bus Bars.........................................................................................................
5
4.1.4 Earthing..........................................................................................................
5
4.1.5 Finish and Painting.........................................................................................
5
4.1.6 Marking and Labelling of Cables..................................................................
5
4.1.7 Name Plate....................................................................................................
5
4.1.8 System and Panel Configuration..................................................................
6
4.1.9 System Configuration..................................................................................
6
4.1.10 Constructional Features of Panel..............................................................
6
4.1.11 Electrical Requirements:...........................................................................
7
4.1.12 DC output Characteristics of Modules......................................................... 8
4.1.13 Current Limiting (Voltage Droop)................................................................. 8
4.1.14 Soft/Slow Start Feature
.................................................................................9
4.1.15 Voltage overshoot/Undershoot.................................................................
9
4.1.16 Electrical Noise.........................................................................................
9
4.1.17 Parallel Operation.....................................................................................
9
4.1.18 Protection..................................................................................................
10
4.1.19 DC Over voltage protection.......................................................................... 10
4.1.20 Fuse/Circuit Breakers...............................................................................
10
4.1.21 AC Under/Over Voltage Protection.............................................................
10
4.1.22 Over Load/Short Circuit Protection.............................................................. 10
4.1.23 Alarms and indicating lamps
......................................................................10
4.1.24 Termination...................................................................................................... 11
4.1.25 DC Terminations......................................................................................... 11
4.1.26 Earthing Cables..........................................................................................
11
4.1.27 Alarms......................................................................................................
11
4.1.28 Digital Meters/Display Unit........................................................................
12
4.2 Cabling & Enclosure Requirements.................................................................. 12
4.2.1 Power Cables............................................................................................... ........13
4.2.2 Enclosure/Panel Earthing............................................................................
13
4.3 Temperature Compensation for Battery........................................................
13
4.4 Battery Requirements..................................................................................
15
4.4.1 Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) maintenance free Battery...................... 15
4.4.1.1 Constructional Requirements
......................................................................15
4.4.1.2 Containers...................................................................................................
15
4.1.1.3 Cell Covers..............................................................................................
15
4.4.1.4 Separators........................................................................................................... 15
4.4.1.5 Pressure Regulation Valve.................................................................................16
4.4.1.6 Terminal Posts...................................................................................................16
Section-04
Page 1 of 17

4.4.1.8 Flame Arrestors..................................................................................................16

4.5 Capacity Requirements.................................................................................
16
4.6 Expected Battery Life...................................................................................
17
4.7 Routine Maintenance of Battery system.......................................................
17
Section-04
Page 2 of 17

Section-04
DC Power Supply System
In order to provide reliable power supply to computer loads & communication equipment at
various locations, the 48 V DC power supply system is to be provided as a part of this project.
This section describes the technical requirement of DC power supply & associated Battery.
The DC Power Supply system shall be capable of meeting the load requirements for various
Telecom equipments and other associated equipment located indoor, i.e. at the substations and
control centers. The required load (in Amps) for each location alongwith the Battery capacity is
indicated in the Appendix, BoQ. The rating of offered SMPS modules shall meet Employers
requirements of DCPS system as stipulated in the BoQ.
The field site DC Power supply system shall have a single DC power supply system as per
conceptual configuration diagram given in Fig.4-1, shall be supplied.
Surge protection devices shall be installed in the DCPS panel to provide adequate protection
against current and voltage transients introduced on input mains AC due to load switching and
low energy lightning surges. These protection devices shall be in compliance with IEC 61312,
IEC 61024 and VDE 0100-534 for following surges:
It shall be provided with Class B & C type surge protection device. The device must be
provided with Class B type lightning current arrester (Switching Type) with a discharge current
capacity of at least 50 kA, 10/350 s, and Class C type surge arrester (linear device) as per IEC
61643-1. The blind spots shall be avoided in accordance to IEC 61312. The Class C surge
protection device should be pluggable type, equipped with features of thermal disconnection, &
health indication and potential free contacts for surge arrestors connected between phase &
neutral.
The surge protection device shall comply to IEC 61643.
a) Lightning Electromagnetic impulse and other High Surges (Class B):
Between
Requirement
Ph & N
Iimp 50 kA, 10/350 S for each phase
N & PE
Iimp 100 kA, 10/350 S
Iimp= Value of Lightning Impulse Current
Rated input voltage of Class B surge arrestors shall not be less than 320 V.
b) Low Voltage Surges (Class C)
Between
Ph & N
Section-04
Requirement
In 10 kA, 8/20 S for each phase
Page 3 of 17

N & PE
In 20 kA, 8/20 S
In= Value of Nominal Discharge Current.
Voltage rating of Class C surge arrestors shall be minimum 320 V.
The ClassB & C Surge protection devices shall work in tandem and in perfect co-ordination
to give complete protection to the DCPS system against lightning and switching surges.
4.1
General Technical Requirements for SMPS based DC power supply units
SMPS based DC power supply system is to be used in Auto Float-cum-Boost Charge mode as a
regulated DC Power source. DCPS system is to be installed indoors and shall be provided with
IP21 panels. The System shall consist of the following:
SMPS modules
(a)
Controller module to control and monitor all DCPS modules.
The Panel, Distribution/Switching arrangement shall be provided for the ultimate system
capacity. Ultimate System capacity is defined as 150% of the present capacity specified in
Appendix B, BOQ. The ultimate capacity is over and above the requirement of redundancy
wherever specified. All factory wiring for the panel shall be for the ultimate capacity so that only
plugging-in of SMPS module shall enhance the DC power output.
The size of fuses, MCBs, switch, bus etc shall be suitable for the ultimate capacity.
The system shall be sufficiently flexible to serve any load depending on manufacturers design,
rating and number of SMPS modules used in panel and system configuration. To cater for higher
load requirements, same type of SMPS modules mounted in the same rack or different racks shall
be capable of working in parallel load sharing arrangement. The SMPS modules of DCPS system
shall be suitable for operation from single phase A.C. mains/DG set supply. However, the input
AC mains supply to DCPS system shall be 3-phase, 4 wire which shall be evenly distributed
among all the offered SMPS modules.
4.1.1 Operational/Component Requirements

The basic modules shall operate at specified ratings and conform to requirements stipulated in
this specification. The DCPS system shall meet requirement of the latest TEC specification /
IEC/BS for other parameters as applicable. The component parts of the equipment shall be of
professional grade of reputed manufacturer to ensure prompt and continuous service and delivery
of spare parts. The component shall confer to relevant IEC/IS standards. The contractor shall
obtain Employers approval of major component before procurement of the same.
Section-04
Page 4 of 17

4.1.2 Wiring
All insulated conductors except those within the confines of a printed circuit board assembly
shall be of the rating enough to withstand the maximum current and voltage during fault and
overload. All insulated conductors/cables used shall conform to IS 1554 or equivalent
international standard.
All wiring shall be neatly secured in position and adequately supported. Where wires pass
through any part of metal panel or cover, the hole through which they pass shall be suitably
secured.
4.1.3 Bus Bars
High conductivity Cu bus bar shall be provided and shall be sized to take care of the current of
ultimate DCPS system capacity for which it is designed. However, it shall not be less than 25mm
X 5mm.
4.1.4
Earthing
Two earth terminals shall be provided in the frame of the system. The Contractor shall connect
these earth terminals to the earth bus. All modules and devices shall be connected to these earth
terminals. The hinged door, if provided shall be connected to the panel with braided Cu at two
points at least.
4.1.5
Finish and Painting
The finish of Steel/Aluminum alloy structure and panels shall conform to relevant IS
specification (or equivalent international specifications). The colour code scheme for Panel &
Door (if provided) shall be decided during detailed engineering.
4.1.6
Marking and Labelling of Cables
The Contractor shall propose a scheme for marking and labeling the inter panel cables by
Halogen & Silicon free labels of polyamide ensuring scratch proof labelling with the use of
solvent free ink & latest UV Technology making it environment friendly printing with a WIPE
RESISITANCE according to DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411-1 and get it approved from the
Employer. A cabling diagram, screen printed or any other better arrangement ensuring better life
expectancy shall be placed in the inside of the front door or any other convenient place for ready
reference of the maintenance staff.
4.1.7
Name Plate
A name plate etched, engraved, anodized or any other better arrangement ensuring better life
expectancy shall be suitably fixed on each panel /module and contain at least the following
information :
Section-04
Page 5 of 17

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
4.1.8
Specification Number
Type of the Unit
Manufacturers Name and identification
Model No
Unit serial No
Input voltage and phase
Output Voltage and Current
Year of manufacture
System and Panel Configuration
The mechanical and electrical requirements of the Panel are described as below:
4.1.9
System Configuration
The SMPS modules shall be accommodated in panels. The system shall employ a modular
configuration to provide flexibility, keeping in view the future load requirements of DC Power.
The system shall be configured for ultimate capacity as brought out in Section 4.1. The Control,
Monitoring, Alarm arrangement and DC & AC distribution shall be provided suitably in the
panel.
The SMPS modules shall be provided as per the load requirement stipulated in the Appendix,
BOQ. The DCPS system shall comprise of N+2 Modules. In case of DCPS system having N=1,
the SMPS shall comprise of N+1 modules. Here N refers to number of SMPS modules to meet
the load requirements specified in the Appendix, BOQ and battery charging current. The current
rating of each module shall be considered as output current of the SMPS module at nominal
voltage (48V).
Total current = load current + battery charging current
Where, battery charging current is equal to the 20 % AH of the battery supplied.
Total Current
N=
Current rating of each SMPS module at 48 V
The Distribution/switching/Alarm unit shall be provided for the ultimate system capacity. All
AC, DC or control/alarm cabling/wiring shall be pre-wired for the ultimate capacity so that mere
plugging-in of SMPS module shall add to the DC power output.
It shall be possible to easily mount/remove the modules from the front side of the panel. The
SMPS modules/SMPS module sub-racks shall be designed to slide into the panels
and fixed securely by a suitable mechanical arrangement.
4.1.10 Constructional Features of Panel
Section-04
Page 6 of 17

Panel (Enclosure) shall be freestanding type of design, in case of specifically it is not mentioned
in the relevant section. Cable entry shall be from the bottom/top of the enclosures (to be finalized
during detailed engineering). For the enclosures/panel, the front door (if provided) shall not be
wider than 80 cm and rear door may be of hinged or removable type with locking as per standard
design of the manufacturer. Keyed locking is required with identical keys for all enclosures. The
enclosures shall not exceed 220 cm in height. The thickness of the structural frames and load
bearing members shall be minimum 2.0 mm and for others shall be minimum 1.6 mm. The
panels/boards shall be equipped with necessary cable gland plates. The Contractor shall state the
type, size, and weight of all enclosures and indicate the proposed manner of installation. The
degree of protection of DCPS enclosures shall preferably be IP21, however in case no door is
provided then the top of the enclosure/panel shall be fully covered except for proper ventilation
and bus bar or cable entries.
Wiring within panel shall be neatly arranged and securely fastened to the enclosure by nonconductive fasteners. Wiring between all stationary and moveable components, such as wiring
across hinges or to components mounted on extension slides, shall allow for full movement of
the component without binding or chafing of the wire. Conductors in multi conductor cables shall
be individually colour coded, and numbered at both ends by Halogen & Silicon free labels of
polyamide ensuring scratch proof labelling with the use of solvent free ink & latest UV
Technology making it environment friendly printing with a WIPE RESISITANCE according to
DIN EN 61010-1/VDE 0411-1within enclosures.
The enclosures shall be painted inside and outside. The finish colour of all enclosures shall be an
aesthetically pleasing and shall be approved by the Employer. Further, finish colour of external
surfaces shall be preferably of same colour for all enclosures/panels.
Each panel shall be supplied with 240 VAC, 50Hz single-phase sockets with switch and lighting
lamp for panel illumination.
The manufacturer so as to ensure the uninterrupted use of the equipment shall do proper thermal
engineering of hardware design. The Panel shall be designed to allow cooling preferably by
natural convection. The Contractor shall submit detail design of proposed Panel/enclosure and
heat dissipation calculations during detailed engineering. Forced cooling is permitted (DC Fans
are permitted in the Panel or SMPS module) for equipment mounted indoors
(buildings/rooms/shelters). If cooling is provided at Panel level it shall be provided with
additional fan with facility for manual switch over. Proper filtering shall be provided to control
dust ingress. There shall be an arrangement for automatic Switching-OFF of fans during AC
input failure. The required individual modules may be separated by air baffle to provide effective
convection. The manufacturer shall also ensure that the failure of fan does not cause any fire
hazards. The failure of any of the fans shall draw immediate attention of the maintenance staff.
4.1.11 Electrical Requirements:

AC input supply: The nominal input frequency is 50 Hz, which may vary from 47.552.5Hz. The input voltage shall be as mentioned below:
Section-04
Page 7 of 17

Field Site Application Three phase/4Wire (Nominal 415/240 V): 415 + 10 % 15%. However, at site the voltage may vary from 160V to 300V (Ph-N). An AutoMains Changeover unit shall be provided for each field site DC power supply system.
The Auto-Mains Changeover unit shall accept input from two AC sources and extend
any one of the available healthy sources to the DC Power supply system.
Control Centre Site Application Three phase/4Wire (Nominal 415/240 V): 415 +
10 % - 15%. However, at site the voltage may vary from 160V to 300V (Ph-N).
The suitable HVD (High Voltage Disconnector) Protection shall be provided at input of
each DCPS system. This HVD protection shall protect the SMPS modules of DCPS
system against the sustained over voltage at the input.
There shall be an automatic arrangement for shutting off of the SMPS module whenever the input
voltage is beyond the specified operating limits with suitable alarm indication. The SMPS
module shall resume normal working automatically when the input is restored within the working
limits. Hysteresis within specified working limits shall not cause shutting down of the SMPS. A
tolerance of 5V may be acceptable for protection & alarm operation.
4.1.12 DC output Characteristics of Modules
The module shall be capable of operating in Auto Float-cum-Boost Charge mode depending on
the condition of the battery sets being sensed by the Control unit.
(a) The float voltage shall be continuously adjustable & pre-settable at any value in the range of
48 to 56V or as per battery manufacturer recommendations either at the module or may
be set from the common controller configuration. Further, the prescribed float voltage
setting shall be based on recommendations of the battery supplier.
(b) In Boost charge mode, DCPS shall supply battery & equipment current till terminal voltage
reaches set value, as recommended by the battery supplier & shall change
over to constant voltage mode
(c) The DC output voltage variation shall not be more than 2% for load variation from 25%
load to full load.
4.1.13 Current Limiting (Voltage Droop)
The current limiting (Voltage Droop) shall be provided in DCPS SMPS modules in float and
boost charge modes of operation. The float/boost charge current limiting shall be continuously
adjustable between 50 to 100% of rated output current for output voltage range of 44.4 volts to
56 Volts or as per manufacturers specified catalogue.
The float and boost charge current limit adjustment shall be provided in the DCPS system. The
SMPS modules shall be fully protected against short circuit. It shall be ensured that short circuit
Section-04
Page 8 of 17

does not lead to any fire hazard.

4.1.14 Soft/Slow Start Feature
Soft/Slow start circuitry shall be employed such that SMPS module input current and output
voltage shall reach their nominal value within 10 seconds.
The maximum instantaneous current during start up shall not exceed the peak value of the
rectifier input current at full load at the lowest input voltage specified.
4.1.15 Voltage overshoot/Undershoot
The requirements of (a) to (c) given below shall be achieved without a battery connected to the
output of SMPS modules.
(a) The SMPS modules shall be designed to minimize DC output voltage
Overshoot/Undershoot such that when they are switched on the DC output voltage shall
be limited to 5% of the set voltage & return to their steady state within 20 ms for load
variation of 25% to 100%.
(b) The DC output voltage overshoot for a step change in AC mains as specified in clause
4.3.12 Electrical Requirements shall not cause shut down of SMPS module and the
voltage overshoot shall be limited to 5% of its set voltage and return to steady state
within 20ms.
(c ) The modules shall be designed such that a step load change of 25 to 100% and vice versa
shall not result in DC output voltage Overshoot/Undershoot of not more than 5% and
return to steady state value within 10 ms without resulting the unit to trip.
4.1.16 Electrical Noise
The Rectifier (SMPS) Modules shall be provided with suitable filter at output with discharge
arrangements on shut down of the modules. The Psophometric Noise (e.m.f weighted at 800Hz)
with battery connected across the output should be within 2 mV at full load at nominal input AC
supply. For test purposes, this shall be taken as equivalent to 4mV when the battery is not
connected and in accordance to ITU-T Rec. O.41.
Voltage at the output of the Rectifier (SMPS) module, without battery connected, shall not
exceed 300 mV at the switching frequency measured by an Oscilloscope of 50/60 MHz
bandwidth (Typical).
4.1.17 Parallel Operation
SMPS modules shall be suitable for operating in parallel with one or more modules of similar
type, make and rating, other output conditions remaining within specified limits.
Section-04
Page 9 of 17

The current sharing shall be within 10% of the average current per rectifier module individual
capacity of each rectifier module in the system (mounted in the same or different Panels) when
loaded between 50 to 100% of its rated capacity for all other working conditions.
4.1.18 Protection
The SMPS module, which has failed (for any reason) shall be automatically isolated from the rest
of the modules and an alarm shall be initiated for the failure.
4.1.19 DC Over voltage protection
DCPS shall be fitted with an internal over voltage protection circuit.
In case output DC voltage exceeds 57V or as per the recommendations of the manufacturer of
batteries, the over voltage protection circuit shall operate & shut off the faulty module. A
tolerance of 0.25V is permitted in this case.
Shutting off of faulty SMPS module shall not affect the operation of other SMPS modules
operating in the Panel. Operation of over voltage shut down shall be suitably indicated and
extended monitoring/control unit. The circuit design shall ensure protection against the discharge
of the Battery through the SMPS module in any case. The over voltage protection circuit failure
shall not cause any safety hazard.
4.1.20 Fuse/Circuit Breakers
Fuses or miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be provided for each SMPS module as follows:
1. Live AC input line
2. Control Circuit
All fuses/circuit breaker used shall be suitably fault rated.
4.1.21 AC Under/Over Voltage Protection
AC input Under/Over voltage protection shall be provided as per clause 6.1.12 for Electrical
Requirements. The DC side of the SMPS should also be provided with surge protection device
to protect the SMPS in case of transients being generated by the loads or due to induction in the
DC line from the AC line running parallel together. The Surge protection device should be able
to discharge a current of at least 10 kA of 8/20 s (Class C surge arrestor), pluggable and
should have indication to show its health to facilitate the replacement on fault condition.
.
4.1.22 Over Load/Short Circuit Protection
The SMPS shall be protected for Over load/Short circuit as per clause 6.1.14 Current Limiting
(Voltage Droop).
4.1.23 Alarms and indicating lamps
Section-04
Page 10 of 17

Visual indications/display such as LEDs, LCDs or a combination of both shall be provided on

each SMPS module for detection of SMPS module failure.
4.1.24 Termination
Suitable termination arrangements shall be provided in the panel for termination of inter cubicle
cables from other equipment such as Employers ACDB, Telecom and other associated
equipments and alarm cables. All the termination points shall be easily accessible from front and
top. AC and DC terminals shall be separated by physical barriers to ensure safety. All the
terminals except AC earth shall be electrically isolated.
4.1.25 DC Terminations
All terminations including through MCBs shall be through lock and screw type terminations.
Load and batteries shall be connected to DCPS through appropriate MCBs. The isolation of any
of the battery from the load shall create an alarm. DC distribution shall be provided with
adequate no. of feeders with appropriate MCBs (6 Amp thru 32 Amp) for termination of the
loads. Actual rating of the MCBs shall be finalized during the detail engineering. The no. of
feeders shall be minimum 10 (ten) nos.
DC distribution may be done either on wall mounted panel or on the DCPS panel. The proper
rated MCB shall be provided at the combined output of the SMPS modules (if not provided at
each SMPS module). All the AC, DC and Control/alarm cabling shall be supplied with the Panel.
All DC +ve and ve leads shall be clearly marked. All conductors shall be properly rated to
prevent excessive heating.
4.1.26 Earthing Cables
Earthing cables between equipment and grounding bus bars shall be minimum size 70 mm2
stranded conductors copper/copper strip, rated at 300 volts. All hinged doors shall be earthed
through flexible earthing braid. Signal and Safety earthing shall be provided separately.
4.1.27 Alarms
Following Visual indications/display such as LEDs, LCDs or a combination of both shall be
provided to indicate :
Functional Indications for local monitoring:
a)
b)
c)
Mains available (not mandatory if provided at module level)

DCPS/SMPSs in Float charge Mode
DCPS/SMPSs in Boost Charge Mode
Alarm Indication for local monitoring:

a)
Section-04
Load Voltage High /Low
Page 11 of 17

b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
DCPS module/SMPS fail

Mains out of range
System Over Load
Mains ON/Battery Discharge
Battery fail/isolated
All the protections/alarms shall be within tolerance of 0.25V in case of DC voltage, 1% in

case of DC current and 5V for AC voltage
Alarm Indication for remote monitoring:
a)
b)
c)
Input AC mains supply fail alarm

Battery low voltage (Pre cut off) alarm
DCPS module fail
Potential free Contacts in two numbers for each of the above remote monitoring alarms (one for
remote alarm interfaced through communication equipments and one redundant for local
monitoring at suitable location) shall be provided. All these potential free contacts are to be
wired and terminated at the suitable location for interfacing purpose.
4.1.28 Digital Meters/Display Unit
There shall be provision to monitor the following parameters through digital meters or digital
display units:
(a) Input AC voltage.
(b) Out put DC voltage
(c) Output DC current of charger
(d) Battery current
(e) Load current.
The Digital display of meters or LCD based display unit shall be with minimum 31/2 digital
display of height 12mm and shall have accuracy 1.5% or better.
4.2
Cabling & Enclosure Requirements
The contractor shall supply, install and commission all power cables, control cables, network
interface cables and associated hardware (lugs, glands, cable termination boxes etc.) as required
for all equipment. The contractor shall be responsible for Cable laying and termination at both
ends of the cable. The Contractor shall also be responsible for termination of feeder cables at
contractors equipment end including supply of suitable lugs, glands, terminal blocks & if
necessary cable termination boxes etc. All cabling, wiring, and interconnections shall be installed
in accordance with the following requirements.
Section-04
Page 12 of 17

4.2.1 Power Cables

All external power cables shall be stranded Aluminium conductor, armoured XLPE/PVC
insulated and sheathed, 1100V grade as per IS 1554 Part-I.
4.2.2 Enclosure/Panel Earthing
Each enclosure shall include suitable earth networks within the enclosure. Earth network shall be
a copper bus bar, braid or cable inside enclosures.
The safety earth network shall terminate at two/more studs for connecting with the earthing grid.
Safety earthing cables between equipment and enclosure grounding bus bars shall be minimum
size 6 sq. mm, stranded copper conductors, rated at 300 volts. All hinged doors (if provided)
shall be earthed through flexible earthing braid.
For all enclosures requiring AC input power, the green earthing wire from the AC input shall be
wired to the safety earthing stud. The Contractor shall provide all required cabling between
enclosures for earthing. The contractor shall connect safety and signal earths (as applicable) of
each enclosure to the Employer provided nearest earth grid/earth riser through suitable 50X6 sq.
mm. GI strips or suitably sized copper cable.
The signal earthing network shall terminate at a separate stud connection, isolated from safety
ground. The stud connection shall be sized for an external earthing cable equipped with a suitable
lug.
All earthing connections to equipment shall be made directly to each equipment chassis via
earthing lug and star washer. Use of the enclosure frame, skins, or chassis mounting hardware for
the earthing network is not acceptable.
4.3
Temperature Compensation for Battery
There shall be provision for monitoring the temperature of battery and consequent arrangement
for Automatic temperature compensation of the SMPS output voltage to match the battery
temperature dependant charge characteristics. The output voltage of the rectifier in Float/Charge
operation shall decrease or increase at the rate of 72 mV (3mV/cell, 24 cell battery) per degree
increase or decrease in temperature over the set voltage or as may be recommended by the VRLA
Battery supplier. A tolerance of +/- 5mV may be acceptable over the specified rate of 72
mV/degree C. The output voltage shall decrease till the open circuit voltage of the battery is
reached. The open circuit voltage range shall be settable between 2.1V/cell to 2.2V/cell. The
increase in output voltage due to decrease in temperature has been taken care of by the tripping of
the unit due to output voltage high (57V) protection. Failure of temperature compensation circuit
including sensors shall create an alarm and shall not lead to abnormal change in output voltage.
The nominal distance between the battery & DCPS system may be 20 metres. The Contractor
shall provide the necessary sensor and cord for the purpose with DCPS system.
Section-04
Page 13 of 17

FIG. 4-1 : CONCEPTUAL CONFIGURATION OF DC POWER SUPPLY (DCPS)

SYSTEM (For Field Sites Locations)
SOURCE A
(3-PH AC)
SOURCE B
(3-PH AC)
4-P
MCCB
CLASS B
& C SPDs
CLASS B
& C SPDs
INPUT SUPPLY
AUTO CHANGE-OVER
SCHEME WITH HVD
PROTECTION
+ve
SMPS Modules
Switch
1
NEUTRAL (N)
PHASE (PH)
-ve
+ve
MC
B
Feeder
#1
Feeder
#2
Feeder
#3
Feeder
#4
-ve
+ve
MC
B
Battery
N+2
-ve
Feeder
#10
-ve
+ve
Earth
Section-04
Page 14 of 17

4.4
Battery Requirements
4.4.1 Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) maintenance free Battery

The contractor shall supply Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) maintenance free Battery. Each
battery set shall have sufficient capacity to maintain output at full rated load as indicated in BOQ
in Appendix. The battery shall be capable of being recharged to 90% State of Charge (SOC)
from the fully discharged condition (1.75V/cell) within 8 hrs. In all cases, the battery is normally
not allowed to discharge beyond 80% of rated capacity (80% DOD) at 10 hours rate of discharge.
The supplier, supplying the cells/batteries as per this document shall be responsible to
replace/repair free of charge, the battery/cell becoming faulty, owing to defective workmanship
or material as per the provisions of the bid document
4.4.1.1 Constructional Requirements
The design of battery shall be as per field proven practices. Partial plating of cells is not
permitted. Paralleling of cells externally for enhancement of capacity is not permitted. Protective
transparent front covers with each module shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with
live module/electrical connections.
4.4.1.2 Containers
The container material shall have chemical and electro-chemical compatibility and shall be acid
resistant. The material shall meet all the requirements of VRLA batteries and be consistent with
the life of battery. The container shall be fire retardant and shall have an Oxygen Index of at least
28%. The porosity of the container shall be such as not to allow any gases to escape except from
the regulation valve. The tensile strength of the material of the container shall be such as to
handle the internal cell pressure of the cells in the worst working condition. Cell shall not show
any deformity or bulge on the sides under all working conditions. The container shall be capable
of withstanding the rigours of transport, storage and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in
a steel tray.
4.1.1.3 Cell Covers
The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container material and
permanently fixed with the container. It shall be capable to withstand internal pressure without
bulging or cracking. It shall also be fire retardant. Fixing of Pressure Regulation Valve &
terminal posts in the cover shall be such that the seepage of electrolyte, gas escapes and entry of
electro-static spark are prevented.
4.4.1.4
Separators
The separators used in manufacturing of battery cells, shall be of glass mat or synthetic material
having high acid absorption capability, resistant to sulphuric acid and good insulating properties.
The design of separators shall ensure that there is no misalignment during normal operation and
handling.
Section-04
Page 15 of 17

4.4.1.5
Pressure Regulation Valve
Each cell shall be provided with a pressure regulation valve. The valve shall be self re-sealable
and flame retardant. The valve unit shall be such that it cannot be opened without a proper tool.
The valve shall be capable to withstand the internal cell pressure specified by the manufacturer.
4.4.1.6
Terminal Posts
Both the +ve and ve terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper termination and shall
ensure its consistency with the life of the battery. The surface of the terminal post extending
above the cell cover including bolt hole shall be coated with an acid resistant and corrosion
retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is in contact with the electrolyte
shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a proven material that does not have any
harmful effect on cell performance. Both +ve and ve posts shall be clearly and unambiguously
identifiable.
4.4.1.7 Connectors, Nuts & Bolts, Heat Shrinkable Sleeves
Where it is not possible to bolt the cell terminals directly to assemble a battery, separate noncorroding lead or copper connectors of suitable size shall be provided to enable connection of the
cells. Copper connections shall be suitably lead coated to withstand corrosion due to sulphuric
acid at a very high rate of charge or discharge.
Nuts and bolts for connecting the cells shall be made of copper, brass or stainless steel. Copper or
brass nuts and bolts shall be effectively lead coated to prevent corrosion. Stainless steel bolts and
nuts can be used without lead coating.
All inter cell connectors shall be protected with heat shrinkable silicon sleeves for reducing the
environmental impact including a corrosive environment.
4.4.1.8
Flame Arrestors
Each cell shall be equipped with a Flame Arrestor to defuse the Hydrogen gas escaped during
charge and discharge. Material of the flame arrestor shall not affect the performance of the cell.
4.4.1.9
Battery Bank Stand
All batteries shall be mounted in a suitable metallic stand/frame. The frame shall be properly
painted with the acid resistant paint. The suitable insulation shall be provided between
stand/frame and floor to avoid the grounding of the frame/stand.
4.5
Capacity Requirements
When the battery is discharged at 10 hour rate, it shall deliver 80% of C (rated capacity, corrected
at 27Celcius) before any of the cells in the battery bank reaches 1.85V/cell.
The battery shall be capable of being recharged from the fully exhausted condition (1.75V/cell)
within 8 hrs. All the cells in a battery shall be designed for continuous float operation at the
specified float voltage throughout the life. Float voltage of each cell in the string shall be within
the average float voltage/cell +0.05V band.
The capacity (corrected at 27Celcius) shall also not be less than C and not more than 120% of C
Section-04
Page 16 of 17

before any cell in the battery bank reaches 1.75V/cell. The battery voltage shall not be less than
the following values, when a fully charged battery is put to discharge at C/10 rate:
(a) After Six minutes of discharge
(b) After Six hours of discharge
(c) After 8 hours of discharge
(d) After 10 hours of discharge
: 1.98V/cell
: 1.92V/cell
: 1.85V/cell
: 1.75V/cell
Loss in capacity during storage at an average ambient temperature of 35 Celsius for a period of 6
months shall not be more than 60% and the cell/battery shall achieve 85% of its rated capacity
within 3 charge/discharge cycles and full rated capacity within 5 cycles, after the storage period
of 6 months. Voltage of each cell in the battery set shall be within +0.05V of the average voltage
throughout the storage period. Ampere hour efficiency shall be better than 90% and watt hour
efficiency shall be better than 80%.
4.6
Expected Battery Life
The battery shall be capable of giving more than 1200 charge/discharge cycles at 80% Depth of
discharge (DOD) at an average temperature of 27 Celsius. DOD (Depth of Discharge) is defined
as the ratio of the quantity of electricity (in Ampere-hour) removed from a cell or battery on
discharge to its rated capacity. The battery sets shall have a minimum expected operational life of
5 years at normal operating conditions or 1200 charge/discharge cycles (whichever is early).
4.7
Routine Maintenance of Battery system
For routine maintenance of battery system, the contractor shall supply one set for each
Constituent of following tools:
a. Torque wrench.
b. Tool for opening /closing of pressure regulation valve of battery.
4.8
Testing requirements
The Contractor shall submit type test reports for the battery for the same make, model & rating as
offered as per the IEC 60896 or equivalent IS/EN/BS/TEC standards. In the event, the type test
reports for exact rating is not available, the Contractor shall submit type test reports for higher
rating Battery.
---------------------------------------------End of this Section--------------------------------------------
Section-04
Page 17 of 17

Section - 5
Environment, EMI, Power Supply, Cabling and Earthing
INDEX
5.1
Environmental Requirements........................................................................................... 2
5.1.1
Temperature and Humidity ....................................................................................... 2
5.1.2
EMI and Electrostatic Interference ............................................................................ 2
5.1.3
Vibration and Shock Resistance ................................................................................ 3
5.1.4
Tropicalization .......................................................................................................... 3
5.1.5
Contaminants............................................................................................................. 3
5.2
Primary Source AC/DC Power Requirements ................................................................. 3
5.2.1
Primary Source AC Power ........................................................................................ 3
5.2.2
-48V DC Power ......................................................................................................... 3
5.2.3
Power Distribution and Protection ............................................................................ 4
5.3
Equipment Construction, Assembly and Installation ....................................................... 4
5.3.1 Identification ............................................................................................................. 4

5.3.1.1 Equipment .............................................................................................................. 4
5.3.1.2 Power Distribution ................................................................................................. 5
5.3.1.3 Signal Cabling ........................................................................................................ 5
5.3.1.4 Equipment Racks and Enclosures .......................................................................... 5
5.3.2 Installation Hardware ................................................................................................ 6
5.3.2.1 Equipment Sub-Racks and Cabinets (Enclosures) ................................................. 6
5.3.2.2 Cable Raceways ..................................................................................................... 7
5.3.3
Signalling Distribution .............................................................................................. 7
5.3.4
Lightning and Transient Voltage Protection ............................................................. 7
5.3.5
Station Safety Earthing and Signal Grounding ......................................................... 8
5.3.6
Interconnections ........................................................................................................ 9
5.3.7
Finish Colors ............................................................................................................. 9
5.4
Location of Equipment, Cable Routes and Associated Civil Works ............................... 9
5.4.1
Locations for Supplied Equipment ............................................................................ 9
5.4.2
Associated Civil Works............................................................................................. 9
5.4.3
Cable Trenches ........................................................................................................ 10
Section-05
Page 1 of 10

Section - 5
Environment, EMI, Power Supply, Cabling and Earthing
The purpose of this section is to describe the minimum general equipment characteristics and
specifications for environmental conditions, source power conditioning and backup, equipment
construction, and installation. The section also highlights the stringent Electro Magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) guidelines for equipment that will be operated under the severest Electro
Magnetic Interference (EMI) and Electro Static Discharge (ESD) conditions expected in an Extra
High Voltage (EHV) power system environment.
5.1
Environmental Requirements
Equipment and their components provided under this specification shall operate reliably under
the following environmental conditions.
5.1.1 Temperature and Humidity
Most of the equipment will not be installed in environmentally controlled shelters. Therefore,
equipment shall operate in accordance with the limits shown in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1
Environmental Operating Limits
Temperature Range:
(Un Controlled Environment)
Specification
Operation without damage
Shipping/storage
0 to 45C
-10 to 55C
-40 to 60C
Relative Humidity, non-condensing
Upto 90%
Elevation:
Operating
Non-operating
to 3,000 m
to 10,000 m
For each location, the Contractor is required to assess the environmental conditions for the
equipment to be installed under this specification. The Contractor is responsible for all necessary
enclosure, rack or equipment upgrades to ensure the proper operation of the installed equipment.
5.1.2 EMI and Electrostatic Interference
At each location, the Contractor shall assess the need for shielding against radiated emissions and
shall provide recommended solutions for any EMI problem found at each location.
Specifications provides the type of immunity tests for which the equipment shall be required to
pass without failure. For the individual tests to be carried out at the different interfaces,
Section-05
Page 2 of 10

references are made to the relevant IEC and ITU-T recommendations.

5.1.3 Vibration and Shock Resistance
As per testing requirements indicated in this specification.
5.1.4 Tropicalization
Communications equipment will often be stored and operated in uncontrolled environment areas
and will be subject to mould, growth of fungus, corrosion and oxidation. The equipment and
components shall be suitably tropicalized during manufacture through commissioning, as
necessary.
5.1.5 Contaminants
Communications equipment may be located in areas of poor air quality with the main
contaminant being dust. Cabinets shall be tight fitting utilizing filtered ventilation openings only.
5.2
Primary Source AC/DC Power Requirements
Facilities will be required to support both AC and DC power load requirements of

telecommunications equipment as specified below:
5.2.1 Primary Source AC Power
It will be the Employer's responsibility to provide required Primary AC source Power for
communications equipment installed under this specification. The Primary AC Power supplied
will be 240 VAC 10%, 50Hz with a frequency variance between 46 and 55 Hz. Harmonic
distortion will not exceed five (5) percent.
All equipment and components provided under this specification requiring Primary AC Power,
shall be designed for normal operation under the above stated tolerances for 240 VAC supply.
The Contractor shall provide in their Bid as well as in the survey report to the Employer the
projected 240 VAC Primary Power load requirement per equipment and totals, by location, for
equipment provided under this specification. The Contractor shall provide suitable UPS for
communication equipment/module etc. requiring AC power supply at locations other than control
centre.
5.2.2 -48V DC Power
Power supplies/converters for communications equipment (except computer system supplied as
part of NMS which shall use 240 VAC) provided under this specification, shall use -48Vdc
uninterrupted primary source power. The power supply may vary normally within the voltage
range -42 to -58 Vdc and the supplied equipment shall operate satisfactorily within this range.
The power supply exists at wideband locations where Fibre Optic Communication links are to be
implemented inlieu of existing digital microwave system. However, at new wideband nodes, the
Section-05
Page 3 of 10

contractor shall be responsible for providing the power supply to the communication equipment.
5.2.3 Power Distribution and Protection
The Employer will furnish only one source primary 240 VAC and/or -48 VDC power. It shall be
the Contractor's responsibility for the connection and distribution of all Primary AC and -48V dc
source power, in full compliance with all local and national electrical codes.
The Employer shall indicate during the survey by Contractor, on the primary source, the
feeders/points that can be used by the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply & install Primary
AC and -48Vdc feeder cables to Contractor-furnished distribution panels.
The Contractor shall provide required distribution panels, circuit breakers and appropriate Panel
Disconnects. Distribution Panel feeders, Panel Disconnects, distribution panels and circuit
breakers shall be sized and equipped to support at least 100% expanded load requirements.
The Contractor shall provide and install all required primary power distribution sourced from the
distribution panels. The Contractor shall also be responsible for Load Balancing.
The Contractor is responsible for all inter-rack (enclosure) and intra-rack (enclosure) power
distribution required to support equipment supplied under this specification. The Contractor shall
provide all cabling, fusing, switching and circuit breaker and surge protection required.
Partially equipped subsystems shall be installed with provision for expansion. Equipment power
supplies provided under this specification, shall be sized to support fully equipped subsystems.
Primary power distribution protection shall be sized to support and protect maximum operating
load potential whether or not the actual projected load shall meet that maximum load potential.
The Contractor shall provide equipment and rack safety earthing in compliance with this
specification.
5.3
Equipment Construction, Assembly and Installation
All equipment supplied under this specification shall be constructed, assembled and installed in
accordance with the following requirements:
5.3.1 Identification
All cabling, racks/enclosures, equipment, modules and materials shall be uniquely identifiable as
per the following:
5.3.1.1 Equipment
Each equipment component to the level of printed circuit card, shall be clearly marked with the
manufacturer's part number, serial number, month/year of manufacture and revision level.
Changes to components shall be identified by an unambiguous change to the marked revision
level. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the master revision level list until the
Section-05
Page 4 of 10

Contractor has complied with all requirements of this specification.

Where custom components and parts are provided, each component/part shall be marked to
specifically identify that component/part. Printed circuit card cages are defined as an equipment
component and as such, shall be clearly identified as stated within this specification.
Equipment chassis and printed circuit card cages having wired backplanes, shall be clearly
marked with the manufacturer's part number, serial number, month/year of manufacture, revision
level and an additional identifier corresponding directly to the applicable backplane wiring
diagram/list.
5.3.1.2 Power Distribution
Power distribution panels shall be clearly marked with their unique identifier, source feed
information, and remote source feed emergency disconnect location and identity.
Power distribution panel "Main Disconnect" and circuit breakers shall be clearly marked with a
unique identifier. Circuit breaker feed lists shall be clear, accurate and the feed list information
shall be posted inside each distribution panel door.
Inter-rack and intra-rack (enclosure) power distribution shall be clearly identified with source
feed, voltage and power rating information. All power feed cabling shall be clearly identified near
the point of termination.
All power distribution identification shall utilize heat-resistant permanent marking techniques
such as stamped non-metallic tags, embossed labels, etc. Marking techniques are subject to
approval by the the Employer. Power distribution identifiers and information shall agree with the
Contractor's power cable plant drawings.
5.3.1.3 Signal Cabling
Connectorised signal cabling/wiring requires marking with a unique identifier at each
connectorised end. The signal cable/wire identifier shall include a cable identifier and the
location of both terminations.
Signal cable/wiring installed on terminal blocks requires marking with the cable identifier and
distant end location. The cable tag shall be clearly visible at the cable fanout point.
All signal cable, wiring and terminations shall be clearly labelled/tagged with identifiers
consistent with Contractor supplied cable plant records. Marking techniques are subject to
approval by the Employer.
5.3.1.4 Equipment Racks and Enclosures
All equipment racks, enclosures and equipment, including distribution frames, shall be clearly
labelled with unique identifiers consistent with Contractor supplied floor plans and rack
elevations.
Section-05
Page 5 of 10

5.3.2 Installation Hardware

Equipment racks, enclosures, cable raceways and installation hardware shall, at a minimum,
comply with the following requirements:
5.3.2.1 Equipment Sub-Racks and Cabinets (Enclosures)
All equipment provided under this specification, shall be physically mounted in sub-racks and
cabinets (enclosures). The Contractor shall determine and propose for the Employer approval, the
type, size, weight and manner of installation for each location.
Selection of equipment sub-racks and cabinets (enclosures) shall meet the following
requirements:
(A)
Equipment SubRack Construction
Equipment Sub Racks provided for installation in environmentally controlled facilities, shall
meet the following minimum requirements:
(B)
Section-05
(1)
Equipment Sub Racks shall be steel/aluminium fabricated and finished on all

surfaces. All metal and welds shall be thoroughly cleaned and sanded to obtain a
smooth finish. All surfaces shall be treated for rust and primed to form a bond
between metal and the finish coats of paint.
(2)
Equipment covers shall be provided for exposed components mounted in

equipment sub Racks.
(3)
Dust and moisture protection shall meet or exceed IP20 standards.
Equipment Cabinet (Enclosure) Construction

(1)
Equipment cabinets (enclosures) shall be steel/ steel & Aluminium extrusion

fabricated and finished on all surfaces. All metal and welds shall be thoroughly
cleaned and sanded to obtain a smooth finish. All surfaces shall be treated for rust
and primed to form a bond between metal and the finish coats of paint.
(2)
Equipment cabinets (enclosures) shall be designed free-standing but shall be

mounted to the floor. Cabinets (enclosures) shall have secure fitting, lockable ,
full-length front doors for access to hardware and wiring. Equipment covers for
exposed components mounted inside cabinets are not required unless specifically
recommended.
(3)
All doors and removable panels shall be fitted with long life rubber beading. All
panels shall be fabricated from minimum 2.0mm thickness steel sheet. However,
for racks with load bearing Aluminium extrusion frame, door panels and side
panels may be fabricated from minimum 1.6mm thickness steel sheet and the top
Page 6 of 10

& bottom panels shall be fabricated from minimum 2.0mm thickness steel sheet.
(4)
Equipment cabinets (enclosures) shall be dust and moisture-proof as per IP41

specification, or better.
5.3.2.2 Cable Raceways

The Contractor is required to provide and install all additional necessary indoor and outdoor
cable raceways. The cable raceways shall be in conformance with the following:
(1)
Signal cabling and power cabling shall require separate cable raceways. Signal
and power cabling shall not share the same raceways and shall be installed as far
apart as is practical. Adequate shielding shall be provided as required.
(2)
All cable raceways shall be sized to support full loading requirements plus at least
a 200% safety loading factor.
(3)
Outdoor cable raceways shall be of corrugated construction and shall be fitted

with solid covers overlapping all sides of the cable raceways.
(4)
Outdoor cable raceways shall be fabricated from construction grade aluminum,

galvanized iron or anodized sheet metal or any other suitable material approved
by the Employer. Suitable anti-corrosion measures shall be taken. Steel fabricated
raceways shall be finished inside and out, treated to resist rust and to form a
metal-to-paint bond.
(5)
Indoor cable raceways fabricated of aluminum or galvanized iron, shall not

normally need special finishing or painting, unless otherwise stipulated by the
Employer. Steel fabricated raceways shall require a red oxide primer coat at a
minimum.
5.3.3 Signalling Distribution

The Contractor shall be responsible for all signal wiring associated with furnished equipment in
accordance with the following:
(1)
All signal wiring connections to the communications equipment shall be via

Krone type or equivalent terminal blocks.
(2)
The Contractor shall provide subscriber level wiring and patching wherever
required.
5.3.4 Lightning and Transient Voltage Protection

The Contractor shall be required to provide protection from lightning and transient voltages for
all wideband communications equipment, in accordance with the following:
Section-05
Page 7 of 10

(1)
At the outside cable plant point-of-entry of all cabling penetrations for all cabling
installed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide lightning and transient
voltage isolation for the inside plants cabling, wiring, and all terminations and
equipment.
(2)
All equipment installed under this specification that requires 240VAC primary
power, shall be surge protected.
5.3.5 Station Safety Earthing and Signal Grounding

For each facility, the Contractor is responsible for meeting the following station and equipment
earthing requirements:
(1)
All safety earthing and signal grounding shall be in full compliance with EMI/EMC
requirements as per relevant international standards
(2)
Each cabinet (enclosure) or cabinet (enclosure) group shall include suitable signal
ground and safety earth networks. The signal ground network shall terminate at a
separate signal ground stud connection isolated from safety earth.
(3)
Each earth/ground network shall utilize copper bus bars, copper braids and/or 16
sqmm or bigger earth cable. All equipment earth/ground connections shall be made
directly to the equipment chassis utilizing grounding lugs and secured metal-to-metal
with star washers. Use of the enclosure frame, skin or chassis mounting hardware as
part of the earthing/grounding networks, is not acceptable.
(4)
The safety earth network shall be connected to "earth ground" at the safety earth stud.
The earth stud connection shall be sized for an external earthing cable equipped with
a 2/0 solid copper lug secured metal-to-metal with star washers. Primary AC feeds
and distribution within enclosures requires earthing wire connection to the safety
earth stud.
(5)
The safety earth and signal ground networks shall be inter-connected only at the safety
earth stud and signal ground stud.
The Contractor shall extend the existing station earth to the equipment room using suitable G.I.
earthing strip (50 x 6 mm), wherever required. .
The Contractor is responsible for providing all required earthing/grounding cable and installation.
Cabinet (Enclosure) and equipment safety earthing and signal grounding shall be subject to the
Employers approval.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the suitability of existing station earth for the
equipment to be supplied under this contract. In case existing earthing arrangement at the site is
not adequate, the Contractor shall either make improvement in the existing earthing arrangement
or make new earthing as per requirement.
Section-05
Page 8 of 10

5.3.6 Interconnections
All power and signal cabling between component units of the communications systems shall be
supplied and installed by the Contractor and shall be shown on contractor-supplied as-built
drawings.
The Contractor shall supply and install all primary power cords, powerstrips, receptacles, circuit
breakers, fuse panels, switches, earth fault detectors, surge protectors, distribution cabling, and
power connectors required to support all equipment enclosures and system components furnished
and installed under this specification, except as specifically excluded.
Plug-type power connectors with captive fastening (such as "Twist-Lock") shall be used for
interconnection of source power to the equipment enclosures or racks.
Plug-type connectors with captive fasteners (ie. DB-25, etc) shall be used for the interconnection
of all inter and intra-enclosure signalling cable.
5.3.7 Finish Colors
Unless otherwise specified, finish colors for enclosures shall be gloss white enamel on the inside,
and semi-gloss medium grey enamel on the outside. Only brushed aluminum trim shall be used.
Employer reserves the right to approve the proposed color scheme.
5.4
Location of Equipment, Cable Routes and Associated Civil Works
During the Site Surveys, the Contractor shall determine and propose locations for all equipment
to be supplied under this contract. Further, the Contractor shall locate and identify proposed
routing for all cabling between all equipment locations including existing and planned equipment
not provided under this contract, but required to be connected under the scope of this contract.
This subsection defines the requirements and clarifies the responsibilities of the Employer and
the Contractor regarding equipment siting, intra and inter facility interconnectivity and necessary
associated civil works.
5.4.1 Locations for Supplied Equipment
All transmission equipment, the NMS and associated DDFs and MDFs, shall generally be
colocated in the same communications room located in the Control Building whenever possible.
5.4.2 Associated Civil Works
The Contractor shall provide all required minor civil works necessary for full connectivity as
required in the Contractors scope of work as follows:
(1)
Section-05
All wall and floor penetrations necessary for the installation of all cabling to be
performed in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
Page 9 of 10

(2)
Installation of racks, cabinets, cable raceways, and cabling supplied as part of this
contract.
5.4.3 Cable Trenches

A network of cable trenches and/or ducts may exist at some sites but shall require expansion
and/or new construction at some stations. It shall be a responsibility of the contractor to cooperate
fully with the Employer and all other on-going project contractors in the planning and efficient
use of existing and new cable trenches. The existing cable trenches/ cable raceways proposed to
be used shall be identified in the survey report. The contractor shall make its best effort to route
the cable through the existing available cable trenches. Where suitable existing cable trenches are
not available, suitable alternatives shall be proposed for Employer approval. The Employer shall
provide any additional cable trenches required for such approved alternatives.
It may be noted that in order to utilise the existing trenches, the Contractor supplied cables may
be required to be co-located with LV cables. Accordingly, the contractor shall ensure that
selection and installation of cables is suitable for the purpose. The contractor shall be responsible
for new building penetrations required for supplied cabling. Caution shall be taken to ensure
existing equipment and site personnel are protected from dust and debris incident to the cable
penetration work. Penetration shall be neatly formed and sealed for protection from moisture,
dust wind and vermin intrusion.
All required fitting, supports, accessories, ducts, inner ducts, conduits, riser and any item not
specially mentioned but required for lay and installation of cables in trenches shall be supplied
and installed by the Contractor.
-------------------------------------End of this Section------------------------------
Section-05
Page 10 of 10

Section - 06
Inspection, Test and Availability
Index
6.1
Inspection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
6.2
Test Plans and Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4
6.2.1
Factory and Site Test Plans ------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
6.2.2
Test Procedures --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
6.2.3
Test Records ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
6.2.4
Rejection of Elements -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
6.2.5
Test Periods Defined --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
6.3
Type Testing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
6.3.1
Type Test Samples ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
6.3.2
List of Type Tests -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
6.3.2.1 List of type test to be conducted on Telecom equipment ----------------------- 10

6.3.2.2 Type Testing of DCPS --------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
6.3.2.3 Testing requirements of Battery -------------------------------------------------------- 15
6.3.2.4 Type Tests for Optical Fibres ------------------------------------------------------------ 16
6.3.2.5 Type Tests for OPGW Cables ---------------------------------------------------------- 17
6.3.2.6 Type Test on OPGW Cable Fittings -------------------------------------------------- 21
6.3.2.7 Type Test on Vibration Damper --------------------------------------------------------- 25
6.3.2.8 Type Tests for Splice Enclosures (Joint Box) --------------------------------------- 27
6.3.2.9 Type Tests for Fibre Optic Approach Cable ----------------------------------------- 29
6.4
Factory Acceptance Tests ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 29
6.4.1
Sampling for FAT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 30
6.4.2
Production Testing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
6.4.3
FAT of Communication Equipments ----------------------------------------------------- 31
6.4.4
FAT/SAT of DCPS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
6.4.5
Factory Acceptance Tests on Optical Fibre to be supplied with OPGW ------- 34
6.4.6
Factory Acceptance Test on OPGW Cable -------------------------------------------- 35
6.4.7
Factory Acceptance Test on OPGW Fittings ------------------------------------------ 36
Section-06
Page 1 of 42

6.4.8
Factory Acceptance Test on Approach Cable ----------------------------------------- 37
6.4.9
Factory Acceptance Test on Splice Enclosure (Joint Box) /FODP --------------- 37
6.4.10 Factory Acceptance Test on Test Equipment, Pigtail & other items ------------- 37
6.5
Site Acceptance Tests ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
6.5.1
Minimum Site Acceptance Testing Requirement for FO Cabling ----------------- 38
6.5.1.1 Phases of Site Acceptance Testing---------------------------------------------------- 38

6.5.2
Phases for Site Acceptance Testing for Communication Equipments ---------- 39
6.5.2.1 Installation Testing ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39

6.5.2.2 Link Commissioning Tests --------------------------------------------------------------- 39
6.5.2.3 Integrated Testing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
Section-06
Page 2 of 42

Section - 06
Inspection, Test and Availability
All materials furnished and all work performed under this Contract shall be inspected and
tested. Deliverables shall not be shipped until all required inspections and tests have been
completed, and all deficiencies have been corrected to comply with this Specification and
approved for shipment by the Employer.
Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide all manpower and materials
for tests, including testing facilities, logistics, power and instrumentation, and replacement of
damaged parts. The costs shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included
in the contract price.
The entire cost of testing for factory & site acceptance, routine tests, production tests and
other test during manufacture & site activities specified herein shall be treated as included in
the quoted unit price of materials, except for the expenses of Inspector/Employers
representative.
Acceptance or waiver of tests shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to
furnish material in accordance with the specifications.
All tests shall be witnessed by the Employer and/or its authorized representative (hereinafter
referred to as the Employer) unless the Employer authorizes testing to proceed without
witness. The Employer representative shall sign the test form indicating approval of
successful tests.
Should any inspections or tests indicate that specific item does not meet Specification
requirements, the appropriate items shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by the Contractor
as necessary to correct the noted deficiencies at no cost to the Employer. After correction of a
deficiency, all necessary retests shall be performed to verify the effectiveness of the
corrective action.
The Employer reserves the right to require the Contractor to perform, at the Employer's
expense, any other reasonable test(s) at the Contractor's premises, on site, or elsewhere in
addition to the specified Type, Acceptance, Routine, or Manufacturing tests to assure the
Employer of specification compliance.
All security related features shall be demonstrated during FAT/SAT as required by the
Employer.
Section-06
Page 3 of 42

6.1 Inspection
Access to the Contractor's facilities during system manufacturing and testing and to any
facility where systems/ equipment are being produced/ tested/ integrated for the fibre optic
communication network, shall be available to the Employer. At all times the Employer shall
have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of such materials or equipment. To facilitate
this, the Contractor shall submit for the Employer approval, a comprehensive Quality
Assurance Plan using ISO 9000 as a general guideline. In addition, the Quality Assurance
Plan shall satisfy the following:
(a) Sufficient office facilities, equipment, and documentation necessary to complete
all inspections and to verify that the equipment is being fabricated and maintained
in accordance with the Specification shall be provided by the Contractor to the
Employer.
(b) Inspections to be performed by the Employer will include visual examination of
hardware, cable dressings, and labelling. Contractor's documentation will also be
examined to verify that it adequately identifies and describes all offered items and
spare parts.
(c) Access to inspect the Contractor's standards, procedures, and records that are
applicable to the supplied equipment shall be provided to the Employer.
Documents will be inspected to verify that the Contractor has performed the
required quality assurance activities.
(d) The inspection rights described above shall also apply to sub Contractors who are
responsible for supplying major components described in this Specification.
These items shall be inspected and tested at the sub Contractor's factory by the
Employer's representatives prior to shipping this equipment to the Contractor's
facility or directly to the Employer.
(e) The above inspection rights shall also apply to sub Contractors supplying
assemblies, subassemblies and components. However, such items will normally
be inspected and tested by the Employer's representatives at the Contractor's site
before acceptance.
6.2 Test Plans and Procedures
Test plans and test procedures for both factory and site acceptance tests shall be provided by
the Contractor. Test plans and test procedures shall ensure that each factory and site test is
comprehensive and verify all the features of the equipment to be tested. Test plans and test
procedures shall be modular to allow individual test segments to be repeated upon request.
The Contractor shall submit a Test Schedule for the Employer's approval within one (1) week
after the award of contract for Type Tests and three (3) months after the award of contract for
all other tests. The test schedule shall list the tests to be carried out, and the approximate test
Section-06
Page 4 of 42

duration. The test periods shall also be indicated in the PERT chart or equivalent for the
work.
The Contractor shall give the Employer twenty one (21) days written notice of any material
being ready for testing. Fifteen days prior to the scheduled testing, the Employer shall provide
written notice to the Contractor of any drawings, equipment, material, or workmanship
which, in the Employers opinion, are not compliant to the specification. The Contractor shall
give due consideration to such objections, if valid, effecting the corrections as necessary or
shall prove, in writing, that said modifications are unnecessary for contract compliance.
6.2.1
Factory and Site Test Plans
A test plan for factory and site acceptance tests shall be submitted for approval, at least four
(4) weeks before the start of testing. The test plan shall be a single overview document that
defines the overall schedule and individual responsibilities associated with conducting the
tests, documenting the test results, and successfully completing the test criteria. Test Plans
shall include, at a minimum, the information contained in Table 6-1.
Item:
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.2.2
Table 6-1
Factory & field Test Plan Requirements
Description:
Test schedule
Record-keeping assignments, procedures and forms
Procedures for monitoring, correcting and retesting
variances
Procedures for controlling and documenting all changes
made to the communications equipment after the start of
testing
Test Procedures
Test procedures for factory and site testing shall be submitted for the Employer approval at
least four (4) weeks before each individual test. Fully approved test procedures shall be
submitted to the Employer at least four weeks prior to the commencement of testing. Testing
shall not commence without approved test procedures. At a minimum, test procedures shall
include the items listed in Table 6-2.
All test equipment and/or instruments shall bear calibration stickers indicating valid
calibration on and beyond the testing date. The time lapsed since last calibration shall not
exceed the test equipment/ jig manufacturer recommended calibration interval or the interval
recommended in the test labs internal quality procedures.
The Contractor shall ensure that all testing will be performed by qualified testing personnel
well experienced in performing such tests.
Section-06
Page 5 of 42

Item:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description of any special test conditions or special actions required. This

includes complete descriptions, listings and user interface procedures for all
special hardware and software tools and/or display formats to be used during the
test.
6.
Test setup including test configuration block diagrams and/or illustrations.

Test procedures to be followed.
Required inputs and expected outputs for each test segment
Acceptance criteria for each test segment.
List of test data to be supplied by the Contractor(s) and copies of any certified
data to be used
Format of test reports.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
6.2.3
Table 6-2
Test Procedure Requirements
Description:
Test Title and Revision Level, if applicable
List of Standard(s) complied with
Function(s) / parameter(s) to be tested
Purpose of each test segment
List of required test equipment
Test Records
Complete and indexed records of all factory and site acceptance tests results shall be
maintained and provided to the Employer by the Contractor in hardcopy. The records shall be
keyed to the steps enumerated in the test procedures. The minimal items required in test
records are described in Table 6-3.
Item:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Section-06
Table 6-3
Test Record Requirements
Description:
Test Title and Revision Level, if applicable; contract references
Date and time for test start and test completed
Test title and reference to the appropriate section of the test procedures
Description of any special test conditions or special actions taken (Includes testcase data).
Test results for each test segment including an indication of Passed, Conditional
Pass, Incomplete or Failed.
Test procedure modifications made during testing.
Variance Report(s) tracking information and copies (if variance(s) was detected).
Contractor's test engineer(s) identification, signature and remarks
Page 6 of 42

Item:
9.
10.
11.
Table 6-3
Test Record Requirements
Description:
Employer's test witness identification, signature and remarks
List of all attachments
Attachments (including system logs, printouts, variances, hard copies of visual
test result displays, etc.)
All principle test records, test certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all
tests carried out as proof of compliance with the specifications and/or each and every
specified test. These test certificates, records and performance curves shall be supplied for all
tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Employer within the specified duration
after the completion of test. Information given on such test certificates and curves shall be
sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificates refer, and shall also
bear the Contractor's reference and heading.
6.2.4
Rejection of Elements
Any item or component which fails to comply with the requirements of this Specification in
any respect, at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site may be
rejected by the Employer either in whole or part as considered necessary.
Material or components with defects of such a nature that do not meet the requirements of the
Specification by adjustment or modification shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense. After adjustment or modification, the Contractor shall submit the items to the
Employer for further inspection and/or tests.
6.2.5
Test Periods Defined
The terminology used in Volume I, General Conditions of Contract and their correlation with
the tests requirements described within this section is as follows:
Pre-Commissioning & Commissioning Period - The Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
Operational Acceptance - Successful completion of SAT
6.3 Type Testing

"Type Tests" shall be defined as those tests which are to be carried out to prove the design,
process of manufacture and general conformity of the materials to this Specification. Type
Testing shall comply with the following:
(a)
Section-06
All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests as per technical
specification.
Page 7 of 42

(b)
The test reports submitted shall be of the tests conducted within last seven (7)
years for OPGW cable and five (5) years for Telecom equipment prior to the
date of bid opening. In case the test reports are older than seven (7) years for
OPGW cable and last five (5) years for Telecom equipment on the date of bid
opening, the Contractor shall repeat these tests at no extra cost to the purchaser.
(c)
The Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of Contract Award, copies of test
reports for all of the Type Tests that are specified in the specifications and that
have previously ( before Contract award) been performed. These reports may be
accepted by the Employer only if they apply to materials and equipment that are
essentially identical to those due to be delivered under the Contract and only if
test procedures and parameter values are identical to those specified in this
specifications carried out at accredited labs and witnessed by third party /
customers representatives.
In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports or any type tests not carried
out, same shall be carried out by Contractor without any additional cost
implication to the Employer.
(d)
Type Tests shall be certified or performed by reputed laboratories using material

and equipment data sheets and test procedures that have been approved by the
Employer. The test procedures shall be formatted as defined in the technical
specifications and shall include a complete list of the applicable reference
standards and submitted for Employer approval at least four (4) weeks before
commencement of test(s). The Contractor shall provide the Employer at least 30
days written notice of the planned commencement of each type test.
(e)
The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule for performing all specified
type tests. These tests shall be performed in the presence of a representative of
the Employer.
(f)
The Contractor shall ensure that all type tests can be completed within the time
schedule offered in his Technical Proposal.
()
(g)
6.3.1
In case of failure during any type test, the Supplier is either required to
manufacture a fresh sample lot and repeat all type tests successfully or repeat
that particular type test(s) at least three times successfully on the samples
selected from the already manufactured lot at his own expenses. In case a fresh
lot is manufactured for testing then the lot already manufactured shall be
rejected.
Type Test Samples
The Contractor shall supply equipment/material for sample selection only after the Quality
Assurance Plan has been approved by the Employer. The sample material shall be
manufactured strictly in accordance with the approved Quality Assurance Plan. The
Contractor shall submit for Employer approval, the type test sample selection procedure. The
Section-06
Page 8 of 42

selection process for conducting the type tests shall ensure that samples are selected at
random. At least three samples of each of the proposed equipment shall be offered for
selection, out of which one sample for each equipment shall be selected.
6.3.2
List of Type Tests
The type testing shall be conducted on the following equipment

(a) SDH Equipment with all types of cards (optical card, Tributary card or any other
equipment as part of repeater less links)
(b) Primary Multiplexer & Drop Insert Mux with subscriber interface card
(c) DACS
(d) DCPC & Battery
(e) Optical fibres
(f) OPGW Cable
(g) OPGW Cable fittings
(h) Vibration Damper
(i) Splice Enclosure (Joint Box)
(j) Approach Cable
Section-06
Page 9 of 42

6.3.2.1 List of type test to be conducted on Telecom equipment

(SDH Equipment with all types of cards, Primary Multiplexer & Drop Insert Mux with
subscriber interface card and DACS)
6.3.2.1.1
Temperature and Humidity Tests
The tests listed below are defined in IEC Publication 60068.

(a)
Low Temperature Test: Operation to Specifications
Low temperature tests shall be conducted as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-1, test
method Ad, with the following specifications:
(b)
(1)
Test Duration: The equipment is started up as soon as thermal equilibrium

has been reached and operated for sixteen (16) hours. Its performance is
checked during the test.
(2)
Degree of Severity: Test shall be done at 0C
(3)
Acceptance Criteria: No degradation of performance during and after the test.
Low Temperature Test : Operation without Damage
Low temperature tests shall be conducted as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-1, test
method Ad, with the following specifications:
(c)
(1)

has been reached and operated for 72 hours. Its performance is checked
during the test and after the test as soon as the thermal equilibrium is reached
at the room temperature (Post-test).
(2)
Degree of Severity: Test shall be done at -10 C
(3)
Acceptance Criteria: Degradation of performance is allowable during the test,

however there shall be no degradation of performance in the post-test.
Dry Heat Test: Operation to Specifications
Dry heat test shall be done as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-2, test method Bd, with the
following specifications:
(1)
Section-06

Page 10 of 42

during the test.
(2)
(3)
(d)
Degree of Severity: As per table 5-1: operation to specification range.

Acceptance Criteria: No degradation of performance during and after the test.
Dry Heat Test: Operation without Damage
Dry heat tests shall be done as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-2, test method Bd, with
the following specifications:
(e)
(1)

during the test and after the test as soon as the thermal equilibrium is reached
at the room temperature (Post-test).
(2)
Degree of Severity: Test shall be done at 55C.
(3)
Acceptance Criteria: Degradation of performance is allowable during the test,

however there shall be no degradation of performance in the post-test.
Damp Heat Test
Damp heat testing reveals aging with respect to the humidity level and applies basically to
electronic equipment. This test shall be done as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-3 with
the following specifications:
(f)
(1)

has been reached and operated for 10 days. Its performance is checked during
the test.
(2)
Acceptance Criteria: The equipment shall meet the specified requirement and
there shall not be any degradation in BER.
Temperature Variation Test
Temperature variation testing shall be as per IEC Publication 60068-2-14 (Gradual

Variations, Method Nb). The equipment shall be powered on and various parameters shall be
monitored continuously during the test period.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Section-06
Number of cycles required is five (5)

The degree of severity: temperature TL:0C, TH: As per table 5-1 (Operation
to specification range)
Cycle duration for each temperature is three (3) hours.
Page 11 of 42

(4)
(5)
6.3.2.1.2
Ramp : 1 oC/minute.
Acceptance Criteria: The equipment shall meet the specified requirement and
there shall not be any degradation in BER.
Power Supply and EMI/EMC tests
The test procedure and acceptance criteria shall be as defined in IEC 60870-2-1.
(a)
Immunity Tests
The list of Immunity tests are specified below in Table 6-4:

Table 6-4: Recommended Immunity Tests
S.
No.
Immunity Test
IEC 1000-4-1
DC
Power
Supply
Control
&
Signal
Telecom
Line
Parametres
Table 11 of IEC
60870-2-1: 1995
- Level : 1
Voltage
Fluctuations
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
Voltage dips and

Interruptions
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
100/1300 s surge
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
1.2/50 - 8/20 s
surges
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
Fast transient bursts
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Damped oscillatory
waves
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
10/700 s surges
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Electrostatic
discharge
Power frequency
magnetic field
10
Damped oscillatory
magnetic field
11
Radiated
electromagnetic
field
Section-06
AC
Power
Supply
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Table 12 of IEC
60870-2-1: 1995
Table 12 of IEC
60870-2-1: 1995
- Level : 4
Table 13 of IEC
60870-2-1: 1995
- Level : 4
Table 14 of IEC
60870-2-1: 1995
- Level : 4
Table 15 of IEC
60870-2-1: 1995
- Level : 4
Page 12 of 42

Table 6-4: Recommended Immunity Tests

S.
No.
Immunity Test
IEC 1000-4-1
12
13
AC
Power
Supply
DC
Power
Supply
Control
&
Signal
Telecom
Line
Parametres
Power Frequency
voltage on control
and signal lines
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
IEC 61000-4-16
: 2002-07
Level : 4
DC voltage on
control and signal
lines
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
IEC 61000-4-16
: 2002-07
Level : 4
-End of Table(b)
Emission Tests
The list of Emission tests are specified below in Table 6-5

Table 6-5:
Recommended Emission Tests
S. NO.
Emission test
AC
Power
Supply
DC
Power
Supply
Contr
ol &
Signal
Telecom
Line
LF disturbance
voltages
CCITT
recommendation
P.53
N/A
Yes
N/A
N/A
Transient
disturbance voltages
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
RF disturbance
voltages
CISPR 22
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
RF disturbance
currents
CISPR 22
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
RF radiated fields
CISPR 22
Parametres
Table 17
of IEC
60870-2-1:
1995 Class : B
Yes
-End Of Table-
Section-06
Page 13 of 42

(c)
Insulation Withstand Voltages
As per section 6 of IEC 60870-2-1. Recommended class : VW1 of Table 18.

6.3.2.1.3
Mechanical Tests
(a) Mechanical Vibration Test

The procedure for this test is described in IEC Publication 60068-2-6. The testing procedure
shall be carried out in the sequence 8.1 + 8.2.1 + 8.1 as described in document 60068-2-6.
For the vibration response investigation (clause 8.1 of 60068-2-6), the test shall be carried out
over a sweep cycle under the same conditions as for the endurance test (described later), but
the vibration amplitude and the sweep rate may be decreased below these conditions so that
the determination of the response characteristics can be obtained.
The endurance test conditions are selected according to the vibration withstand requirements.
Transportation tests shall be performed with the equipment packed according to the
Contractor's specifications.
(b) Shock Test

The procedure of this test is defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-27 (each test) with a
semisinusoidal shape (clause 3.1.1.2).
The recommended severity shall be A = 294 m/s2, D = 18 ms. Three shocks per axis per
direction shall be applied to the equipment packed according to the Contractor's
specifications.
Or
Free Fall Test
This test could be performed as an alternative to the shock or Bump test. The procedure is
defined in IEC publication 60068-2-32. The equipment shall be packed according to the
Contractor's specifications. The drop height shall be defined in accordance with IEC 600682-32 . The surface of the packing case which comes into contact with the ground is the
surface on which the packing case normally rests; if the packing does not have any features
(inscription, special shape, etc.) identifying this surface, the test is carried out successively on
all the surfaces of the packing.
Or
Section-06
Bump Test
Page 14 of 42

This test could be performed as an alternative to Shock test or Free Fall test. The procedure is
defined in IEC 60068-2-29.
6.3.2.2 Type Testing of DCPS
The test reports for Immunity, Emission and safety must be in accordance with relevant
IEC/CISPR standards shall be submitted. The Contractor shall submit the DCPS type test
reports of earlier conducted tests on the same make, model, type & rating which shall include
the following tests listed in Table 6-6.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Table 6-6
Type Tests on DCPS
Surge immunity (Level 4- as per IEC 61000-4-5)
Electrical Fast Transients/Burst (Level 4 as per IEC 61000-4-4)
Electrostatic Discharge (Level 4 as per IEC 61000-4-2)
Radiated Electromagnetic Field (Level 3 as per IEC 61000-4-3)
Conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency field
(Level 3 as per IEC 61000-4-6)
Damped oscillatory magnetic field (Level 3 as per IEC 61000-4-10)
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations
(Level 2 as per IEC 61000-4-11)
Conducted Emission (Level - Class A, Group 1 as per IEC CISPR 11)
Radiated Emission (Level - Class A, Group 1 as per IEC CISPR 11)
Safety Tests (as per IEC 60950)
6.3.2.3 Testing requirements of Battery

Table 6-7
List of tests for VRLA battery
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Section-06
Type Test
Test
As per IEC
FAT
SAT
60896
Verification of marking
- Visual observation
- Dimensional inspection
- Polarity checking
Capacity test
Suitability for floating battery operation (to be
conducted for 3 months instead of six months)
Endurance in discharge/charge cycles (instead
of 50, 25 discharge / charge cycles shall be
followed)
Charge Retention
Page 15 of 42

Type Test
Sl.
Test
No.
As per IEC
FAT
SAT
60896
6.
Short-circuit current and internal resistance
7.
Mechanical Tests
-Vibration Test
(procedure as per IEC 60068-2-6)
- Free fall Test
(procedure as per IEC 60068-2-32)
NOTE :
The batteries shall meet the general requirements as per IEC 60896 or equivalent.
6.3.2.4 Type Tests for Optical Fibres

The type tests listed below in table 6-8 shall be conducted on DWSM fibres to be supplied as
part of overhead cables. The tests specific to the cable type are listed in subsequent sections.
Table 6-8
Type Tests For Optical Fibres
S. No.
Test Name
Acceptance Criteria
Test procedure
Attenuation
As per Section-02 of TS
IEC 60793-1-40
Or EIA/TIA 455-78A
Attenuation Variation with

Wavelength
IEC 60793-1-40
Or EIA/TIA 455-78A
Attenuation at Water Peak
Temp. Cycling
(Temp dependence of
Attenuation)
Attenuation With Bending

(Bend Performance)
IEC 60793-1-47
Or EIA/TIA 455-62A
Mode Field dia.
IEC 60793-1-45 Or
EIA/TIA 455164A/167A/174
Chromatic Dispersion
IEC 60793-1-42 Or
EIA/TIA 455168A/169A/175A
Section-06
IEC 60793-1-40
Or EIA/TIA 455-78A
IEC 60793-1-52
Or EIA/TIA 455-3A, 2
cycles
Page 16 of 42

Table 6-8
Type Tests For Optical Fibres
S. No.
Test Name
Acceptance Criteria
Test procedure
Cladding Diameter
IEC 60793-1-20 Or
EIA/TIA 455-176
Point Discontinuities of
attenuation
IEC 60793-1-40 Or
EIA/TIA 455-59
10
Core -Clad concentricity

error
IEC 60793-1-20 Or
EIA/TIA 455-176
11
Fibre Tensile Proof

Testing
IEC 60793-1-31
Or EIA/TIA 455-31B
-End Of table-
6.3.2.5 Type Tests for OPGW Cables

The type tests to be conducted on the OPGW cable are listed in table 6-9 Type Tests for
OPGW Cables. Unless specified otherwise in the technical specifications or the referenced
standards, the optical attenuation of the specimen, measured during or after the test as
applicable, shall not increase by more than 0.05 dB/Km.
Table 6-9
Type tests for OPGW Cable
S. No.
Test Name
Water Ingress
Test
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
(IEC 60794-1-2 Method F5 or EIA/TIA 455-82B)
: Test duration : 24 hours
Seepage of
filling
compound
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
(EIA/TIA 45581B)
Section-06
Test
Description
Test Procedure
Preconditioning period:72
hours.
Test duration: 24 hours.
Page 17 of 42

Table 6-9
S. No.
Test Name
Short Circuit
Test
Test
Description
IEEE 11382009
Test Procedure
IEEE 1138-2009
Fibre attenuation shall be

continuously monitored and
recorded through a digital
data logging system or
equivalent means.
A suitable temperature
sensor such as thermocouple
shall be used to monitor and
record the temperature inside
the OPGW tube in addition
to monitoring & recording
the temperatures between the
strands and between optical
tube and the strand as
required by IEEE 1138.
Test shall be conducted with
the tension clamps proposed
to be supplied. The cable and
the clamps shall be visually
inspected for mechanical
damage and photographed
after the test.
Initial temperature during the
test shall be greater than or
equal to ambient field
temperature.
IEEE 1138-2009

equivalent means.
The vibration frequency and
amplitude shall be monitored
and recorded continuously.
All fibres of the test cable
sample shall be spliced
together in serial for
attenuation monitoring.
the
tension/suspension
clamps proposed to be
supplied. The cable and the
clamps shall be visually
after the test.
IEEE 1138-2009

the
tension/suspension
Or
IEC60794-410 /
IEC 60794-1-2
(2003)
Method H1
4
Aeolian
Vibration
Test
IEEE 11382009
Or
IEC60794-410 /
IEC 60794-12, Method E19
5
Section-06
Galloping test
IEEE 11382009
Page 18 of 42

Table 6-9
S. No.
Test Name
Test
Description
Test Procedure
clamps proposed to be
supplied. The cable and
clamps shall be visually
after the test. All fibres of
the test cable sample shall be
spliced together in serial for
Cable Bend
Test
Procedure 2 in IEC 60794-1-2

Method E11
The short-term and longterm bend tests shall be

conducted in accordance
with Procedure 2 in IEC
60794-1-2 E11 to determine
the minimum acceptable
radius of bending without
any increase in attenuation
or any other damage to the
fibre optic cable core such as
bird caging, deformation,
kinking and crimping.
Sheave Test
IEEE 11382009
Or
IEC 60794-1-2
(2003)
Method E18B
IEEE 1138-2009

equivalent means.
The Sheave dia. shall be
based on the pulling angle
and the minimum pulley dia
employed during installation.
All fibres of the test cable
sample shall be spliced
together in serial for
Crush Test
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
The crush test shall be

carried out on a sample of
approximately one (1) metre
long in accordance with IEC
60794-1-2 E3. A load equal
to 1.3 times the weight of a
400-metre length of fibre
optic cable shall be applied
for a period of 10 minutes. A
permanent or temporarily
increase
in
optical
attenuation value greater
than 0.1 dB change in
sample shall constitute
failure. The load shall be
further increased in small
(IEC 60794-1-2,
Method E3/
EIA/TIA 455-41B)
Section-06
Page 19 of 42

Table 6-9
S. No.
Test Name
Test
Description
Test Procedure
increments
until
the
measured attenuation of the
optical waveguide fibres
increases and the failure load
recorded along with results.
Impact Test
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
(IEC 60794-1-2
E4/ EIA/TIA 45525B)
The impact test shall be

carried out in accordance
with IEC 60794-1-2 E4. Five
separate impacts of 0.10.3kgm shall be applied. The
radius of the intermediate
piece shall be the reel drum
radius 10%. A permanent
or temporary increase in
optical attenuation value
greater than 0.1 dB/km
change in sample shall
constitute failure.
10
Creep Test
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
As
per
Aluminium
Association Method, the
best-fit straight line shall be
fitted to the recorded creep
data
and
shall
be
extrapolated to 25 years. The
strain margin of the cable at
the end of 25 years shall be
calculated. The time when
the creep shall achieve the
strain margin limits shall
also be calculated.
11
Fibre Strain
Test
IEEE 11381994
IEEE 1138-1994
12
Strain Margin
Test
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
13
Stress strain
Test
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
14
Cable Cut-off
wavelength
Test
IEEE 11381994
IEEE 1138-1994
15
Temperature
Cycling Test
IEEE 11382009
IEEE 1138-2009
Or IEC 60794-1-2, Method F1
16
Corrosion
(Salt Spray)
EIA/TIA 455-16A
Section-06
Page 20 of 42

Table 6-9
S. No.
Test Name
Test
Description
Test Procedure
Test
17
Tensile
Performance
Test
IEC 60794-1-2 E1 / EIA/TIA 455-33B
The test shall be

conducted on a sample of
sufficient
length
in
accordance with IEC
60794-1-2 E1.
The
attenuation variation shall
not exceed 0.05 dB/Km
up to 90% of RTS of fibre
optic cable.
The load shall be
increased at a steady rate
up to rated tensile
strength and held for one
(1) minute. The fibre
optic cable sample shall
not fail during the period.
The applied load shall
then be increased until the
failing load is reached and
the value recorded.
18
Fault Current/
Lightning
Test
IEC 60794-4-10 /
IEC 60794-1-2 (2003)
The OPGW cable

construction shall be
tested in accordance with
IEC 60794-1-2, Method
H2 for Class 1.
19
DC
Resistance
Test
(IEC 60228)
On a fibre optic cable sample of minimum 1 metre length, two

contact clamps shall be fixed with a predetermined bolt torque. The
resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin double bridge by placing
the clamps initially zero metre and subsequently one metre apart.
The tests shall be repeated at least five times and the average value
recorded after correcting at 20C.
-End Of Table-
6.3.2.6 Type Test on OPGW Cable Fittings

The type tests to be conducted on the OPGW Cable fittings and accessories are listed below:
(i) Mechanical Strength Test for Suspension/Tension Assembly
Applicable Standards: IEC 61284, 1997.
Suspension Assembly
The armour rods /reinforcement rods are assembled on to the approved OPGW using the
Installation Instructions to check that the assembly is correctly fitted and is the same that will
be carried out during installations.
Section-06
Page 21 of 42

Part 1:
The suspension assembly shall be increased at a constant rate up to a load equal to 50% of the
specified minimum Failure Load increased and held for one minute for the test rig to
stabilise. The load shall then be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum Failure
Load and held for five minutes. The angle between the cable, the Suspension Assembly and
the horizontal shall not exceed 16o. This load shall then be removed in a controlled manner
and the Protection Splice disassembled. Examination of all the components shall be made
and any evidence of visual deformation shall be documented.
Part 2:
The Suspension clamp shall then be placed in the testing machine. The tensile load shall
gradually be increased up shall gradually be increased up to 50% of the specified Minimum
Failure Load of the Suspension Assembly and held for one minute for the Test Rig to
stabilise and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate until the specified minimum
Failure Load is reached and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this
period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value
shall be documented.
Tension Assembly
The Tension Assembly is correctly fitted and is the same that will be carried out during
installations.
Part 1:
The tension assembly (excluding tension clamp) shall be increased at a constant rate up to a
load equal to 50% of the specified minimum Failure Load increased at a constant rate and
held for one minute for the test rig to stabilise. The load shall then be increased at a steady
rate to 67% of the minimum Failure Load and held for five minutes. This load shall then
remove in a controlled manner and the Tension Assembly disassembled. Examination of the
Tension Dead-End and associated components shall be made and any evidence of visual
deformation shall be documented.
Part 2:
The Tension Dead-End and associated components shall then be reassembled and bolts
tightened as before. The tensile load shall gradually be increased up shall gradually be
increased up to 50% of the specified Minimum Failure Load of the Tension Assembly and
held for one minute for the Test Rig to stabilise and the load shall be further increased at a
steady rate until the specified minimum Failure Load is reached and held for one minute. No
fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the
failing load is reached and the value shall be documented.
Acceptance Criteria for Tension/Suspension Assembly:
- No evidence of binding of the Nuts or Deformation of components at end of Part 1 of Test.
- No evidence of Fracture at the end of one minute at the minimum failure load during Part 2
of the Test.
Any result outside these parameters shall constitute a failure.
Section-06
Page 22 of 42

(ii) Clamp Slip Strength Test for Suspension Assembly

The suspension assembly shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible attachment. A
suitable length fibre optical cable shall be fixed in the clamps. Once the Suspension Clamp
has been assembled, the test rig is tensioned to 1 kN and the position scale on the recorder
zeroed. The test rig is then tensioned to 2.5 kN and the relative positions of the Reinforcing
Rods, Armour Rods and Suspension Clamp shall be marked by a suitable means to confirm
any slippage after the test has been completed. The relative positions of the helical Armour
Rods and associated Reinforcing Rods at each end shall be marked and also 2 mm relative
position between clamp body and Armour Rods shall be marked on one side. The load shall
be increased to 12 kN at a loading rate of 3 kN/min and held for one minute. At the end of
this one minute period, the relative displacement between clamp body and the armour rods
shall be observed. If the slippage is 2 mm or above, the test shall be terminated. Otherwise, at
the end of one minute the position of the clamp body and 2 mm. relative positions between
clamp body and armour rods shall be marked on the other side. After the one minute pause,
the load shall be further increased at a loading rate of 3 kN/min, and recording of load and
displacement shall continue until either the relative Position displacement between clamp
body and armour rods reaches more than 2 mm or the load reaches the maximum slip load of
17 kN. On reaching either of the above values the test is terminated. Visual examination of
all paint marks shall be recorded, and a measurement of any displacement recorded in the
Table of Results.
Acceptance Criteria:
The Suspension Clamp has passed the Slip Test if the following conditions are met:
No slippage* shall occur at or below the specified minimum slip load.

* Definition of no slippage in accordance with IEC 61284, 1997:- Any relative
movement less than 2 mm is accepted. The possible couplings or elongations produced
by the cable as a result of the test itself are not regarded as slippage.
Slippage shall occur between the specified maximum and minimum slip load of 12 17 kN.
There shall be no slippage of the Reinforcing Rods over the cable, and no slippage of
the Armour Rods over the Reinforcing Rods.
The relative movement (i.e. more than 2 mm between Armour Rods & Clamp body)
between minimum 12 kN and maximum slip 17 kN, shall be considered as slip.
The Armour Rods shall not be displaced from their original lay or damaged**.
** Definition of no damage in accordance with convention expressed in IEC 61284:
1997 no damage, other than surface flattening of the strands shall occur.
Any result outside these parameters is a failure.

(iii) Slip Strength Test of Tension Clamp
Tension clamps shall be fitted on a 8 m length of fibre optic cable on both ends. The
Section-06
Page 23 of 42

assembly shall be mounted on a tensile testing machine and anchored in a manner similar to
the arrangement to be used in service. A tensile load shall gradually be applied up to 20 % of
the RTS of OPGW. Displacement transducers shall be installed to measure the relative
movement between the OPGW relative to the Reinforcing Rods and Tension Dead -End
relative to Reinforcing Rods. In addition, suitable marking shall be made on the OPGW and
Dead-End to confirm grip. The load shall be gradually increased at a constant rate up to 50 %
of the UTS and the position scale of the recorder is zeroed. The load shall then gradually
increased up to 95 % of the UTS and maintained for one minute. After one minute pause, the
load shall be slowly released to zero and the marking examined and measured for any relative
movement.
Acceptance Criteria:
- No movement* shall occur between the OPGW and the Reinforcing Rods, or between the
Reinforcing Rods and the Dead-End assembly.
- No failure or damage or disturbance to the lay of the Tension Dead-End, Reinforcing Rods
or OPGW.
* Definition of no movement as defined in IEC 61284: Any relative movement less than 2
mm is accepted. The possible couplings or elongations produced by the conductor as a result
of the test itself are not regarded as slippage.
Any result outside these parameters shall constitute a failure.
(iv) Grounding Clamp and Structure Mounting Clamp Fit Test

For structure mounting clamp, one series of tests shall be conducted with two fibre optic
cables installed, one series of tests with one fibre optic cable installed in one groove, and one
series of tests with one fibre optic cable in the other groove. Each clamp shall be installed
including clamping compound as required on the fibre optic cable. The nut shall be tightened
on to the bolt by using torque wrench with a torque of 5.5 kgm or supplier's recommended
torque and the tightened clamp shall be held for 10 minutes. After the test remove the fibre
optic cable and examine all its components for distortion, crushing or breaking. Also the fibre
optic cable shall be checked to ensure free movement within the core using dial callipers to
measure the diameter of the core tube. The material shall be defined as failed if any visible
distortion, crushing, cracking or breaking of the core tube is observed or the fibre optic cable
within the core tube is not free to move, or when the diameter of the core tube as measured at
any location in the clamped area is more than 0.5 mm larger or smaller of the core diameter
as measured outside the clamped area.
(v) Structure Mounting Clamp Strength Test
The clamp and mounting assembly shall be assembled on a vertical 200 mm x 200 mm angle
and a short length of fibre optic cable installed. A vertical load of 200 kg shall be applied at
the end of the mounting clamp and held for 5 minutes. Subsequently, the load shall be
increased to 400 kg and held for 30 seconds. Any visible distortion, slipping or breaking of
any component of the mounting clamp or assembly shall constitute failure.
Section-06
Page 24 of 42

6.3.2.7 Type Test on Vibration Damper

(a) Dynamic Characteristic Test
The damper shall be mounted with its clamp tightened with torque recommended by the
manufacturer on shaker table capable of simulating sinusoidal vibrations for Critical Aeolian
Vibration frequency band 0.18/d to 1.4/d where d is the OPGW cable diameter in meters.The
damper assembly shall be vibrated vertically with a 1 mm amplitude from 5 to 15 Hz
frequency and beyond 15 Hz at 0.5 mm to determine following characteristics with the help
of suitable recording instruments.
(i)
Force Vs frequency
(ii)
Phase angle Vs frequency
(iii) Power dissipation Vs frequency

The Force Vs frequency curve shall not show steep peaks at resonance frequencies and deep
troughs between the resonance frequencies. The resonance frequencies shall be suitably
spread within the Aeolian vibration frequency-band between the lower and upper dangerous
frequency limits determined by the vibration analysis of fibre optic cable without dampers.
Acceptance criteria for vibration damper:
(i) The above dynamic characteristics test on five damper shall be conducted.
(ii) The mean reactance and phase angle Vs frequency curves shall be drawn with the
criteria of best fit method.
(iii) The above mean reactance response curve should lie within following limits:
V.D. for OPGW - 0.060 f to 0.357 f kgf/mm* Where f is frequency in Hz.
(iv) The above mean phase angle response curve shall be between 25o to 130o within
the frequency range of interest.
(v) If the above curve lies within the envelope, the damper design shall be considered
to have successfully met the requirement.
(vi) Visual resonance frequencies of each mass of damper is to be recorded and to be
compared with the guaranteed values.
(b) Vibration Analysis
The vibration analysis of the fibre optic cable shall be done with and without damper
installed on the span. The vibration analysis shall be done on a digital computer using energy
balance approach. The following parameters shall be taken into account for the purpose of
analysis.
Section-06
(i)
The analysis shall be done for single fibre optic cable without armour rods. The
tension shall be taken as 25% of RTS of fibre optic cable for a span ranging
from 100 m to 1100 m.
(ii)
The self damping factor and flexural stiffness (EI) for fibre optic cable shall be
calculated on the basis of experimental results. The details to experimental
analysis with these data shall be furnished.
Page 25 of 42

(iiiThe power dissipation curve obtained from Damper Characteristics Test shall beused
for analysis with damper.
(iv)
Examine the Aeolian Vibration level of the fibre optic cable with and without
vibration damper installed at the recommended location or wind velocity
ranging from 0 to 30 Km per hour, predicting amplitude, frequency and
vibration energy input.
(v)
From vibration analysis of fibre optic cable without damper, antinode vibration
amplitude and dynamic strain levels at clamped span extremities as well as
antinodes shall be examined and thus lower and upper dangerous frequency
limits between which the Aeolian vibration levels exceed the specified limits
shall be determined.
(vi)
From vibration analysis of fibre optic cable with damper(s) installed at the
recommended location, the dynamic strain level at the clamped span extremities,
damper attachment point and the antinodes on the fibre optic cable shall be
determined. In addition to above damper clamp vibration amplitude and
antinodes vibration amplitudes shall also be examined.
The dynamic strain levels at damper attachment point, clamped span extremities
and antinodes shall not exceed the specified limits. The damper clamp vibration
amplitude shall not be more than that of the specified fatigue limits.
Fatigue Tests
(i) Test Set Up
The clamp slip and fatigue tests shall be conducted on a laboratory set up with a minimum
effective span length of 30m. The fibre optic cable shall be tensioned at 25% of RTS of fibre
optic cable and shall not be equipped with protective armour rods at any point.
Constant tension shall be maintained within the span by means of lever arm arrangement.
After the fibre optic cable has been tensioned, clamps shall be installed to support the fibre
optic cable at both ends and thus influence of connecting hardware fittings are eliminated
from the free span. The clamps shall not be used for holding the tension on the fibre optic
cable. There shall be no loose parts, such as suspension clamps, U bolts, on the test span
supported between clamps mentioned above. The span shall be equipped with vibration
inducing equipment suitable for producing steady standing vibration. The inducing
equipment shall have facilities for step less speed control as well as step less amplitude
arrangement. Equipment shall be available for measuring the frequency, cumulative number
of cycles and amplitude of vibration at any point along the span.
(ii) Fatigue Test

The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span with the manufacturer's specified
tightening torque. It shall be ensured that the damper shall be kept minimum three loops away
from the shaker to eliminate stray signals influencing damper movement.
Section-06
Page 26 of 42

The damper shall then be vibrated at the highest resonant frequency of each damper mass.
For dampers involving torsional resonant frequencies, tests shall be done at torsional modes
also in addition to the highest resonant frequencies at vertical modes. The resonance
frequency shall be identified as the frequency at which each damper mass vibrates with the
maximum amplitude on itself. The amplitude of vibration of the damper clamp shall be
maintained not less than 25/f mm where f is the frequency in Hz.
The test shall be conducted for minimum ten million cycles at each resonant frequency
mentioned above. During the test, if resonance shift is observed, the test frequency shall be
tuned to the new resonant frequency.
The clamp slip test as mentioned herein above shall be repeated after fatigue tests without
retorquing or adjusting the damper clamp, and the clamp shall withstand a minimum load
equal to 80% of the slip strength for a minimum duration of one minute.
After the above tests, the damper shall be removed from fibre optic cable and subjected to
dynamic characteristics test. There shall not be any major deterioration in the characteristics
of the damper. The damper then shall be cut open and inspected. There shall not be any
broken, loose, or damaged part. There shall not be significant deterioration or wear of the
damper. The fibre optic cable under clamp shall also be free from any damage.
For purposes of acceptance, the following criteria shall be applied:
(1)
There shall not be any resonant frequency shift before and after test by
more than 20%.
(j)
(2)
The power dissipation of the damper before and after test at the individual
resonant frequencies do not differ by more than 20%.
6.3.2.8 Type Tests for Splice Enclosures (Joint Box)

Following Type tests shall be demonstrated on the Splice Enclosure(s) (Splice
Enclosure/Box). For certain tests, lengths of the fibre optic cable shall be installed in the
splice box, and the fibres must be spliced and looped in order to simulate conditions of use.
The attenuation of the fibres shall be measured, during certain tests, by relevant Fibre Optic
Test Procedures (EIA/TIA 455 or IEC 60794-1 procedures).
(i) Temperature Cycling Test
FO cable is installed in the splice enclosure and optical fibres spliced and looped. The box
must be subjected to 5 cycles of temperature variations of -40C to +65C with a dwell time
of at least 2 hours on each extreme.
Fibre loop attenuation shall be measured in accordance with EIA 455-20 / IEC 60794-1-C10.
The variation in attenuation shall be less than 0.05dB. The final humidity level, inside the
box, shall not exceed the initial level, at the closing of the box.
Section-06
Page 27 of 42

(ii) Humid Heat test

The sealed splice enclosure, with fibres spliced and looped inside, must be subjected to a
temperature of +55C 2C with a relative humidity rate of between 90% and 95% for 5
days. The attenuation variation of the fibres during the duration of the test shall be less than
0.05dB, and the internal humidity rate measured, less than 2%.
(iii) Rain Withstand Test / Water Immersion test
The splice enclosure with optical fibres cable installed and fibres spliced fixed, shall be
subjected to 24 hours of simulated rain in accordance with IEC 60060 testing requirements.
No water seepage or moisture shall be detected in the splice enclosure. The attenuation
variation of the fibres after the test shall be less than 0.05dB.
(iv) Vibration Test
The splice enclosure, with fibres united inside, shall be subjected to vibrations on two axes
with a frequency scanning of 5 to 50 Hz. The amplitude of the vibrations shall be constant at
0.450mm, peak to peak, for 2 hours, for each of the vibrations' axes. The variation in
attenuation, of the fibres, shall be less than 0.05dB. The splice enclosure shall be examined
for any defects or deformation. There shall be no loosening or visible damage of the FO cable
at the entry point.
(v) Bending and Torsion test
The splice enclosure, with fibres spliced inside, shall be firmly held in place and be subjected
to the following sequence of mechanical stresses on the cable:
a)
3 torsion cycles of 180 shall be exercised on the cable. Each cycle shall be less than
one minute.
b)
3 flexure cycles of the cable, of 180 with one cycle less than one minute.
The variation in the attenuation, of the fibres, shall be less than 0.05dB. The cables
connection ring shall remain securely fixed to the box with the connection maintained firmly.
No defects/fissures shall be noted on the joint ring or on the splice enclosure
(vi) Tensile test
The splice enclosure with cable fixed to the boxes shall be subjected to a minimum tension of
448 N for a period of two minutes. No fissure shall be noted in the connections or on the
box.
(vii)
Drop Test
With 2 lengths of 11 metres of cable fixed to the box, it shall be dropped five times from a
height of 10 metres. There shall be no fissure, at all, of the box, and the connections shall
remain tight. The test surfaces shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60068-2-32.
Section-06
Page 28 of 42

6.3.2.9 Type Tests for Fibre Optic Approach Cable

The type tests to be conducted on the Fibre Optic Approach cable are listed in table 610:Type Tests for Fibre Optic Approach Cable. Unless specified otherwise in the technical
specifications or the referenced standards, the optical attenuation of the specimen, measured
during or after the test as applicable, shall not increase by more than 0.05 dB/Km.
Table 6-10:
Type Tests Fibre Optic Approach Cable
S.NO.
Test Name
Test Procedure
Water Ingress Test
(IEC 60794-1-F5 /
EIA 455-82B) Test duration : 24
hours
Seepage of filling
compound
(EIA 455-81A)
Preconditioning : 72 hours,
Test duration : 24 hours.
Crush Test
(IEC 60794-1-E3/ EIA 455-41)
Impact Test
(IEC-60794-1-E4/ EIA 455-25A)
Stress strain Test
(EIA 455-33A)
Cable Cut-off
wavelength Test
(EIA 455-170)
Temperature Cycling
Test
(IEC60794-1-F1/EIA-455-3A) 2
cycles
-End Of Table-
6.3.2.9.1
Impact Test
The Impact test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC:60794-1-E4. Five separate
impacts of 2.0 kg shall be applied at different locations. The radius of the intermediate piece
shall be the reel drum radius 10%. A permanent or temporary increase in optical attenuation
value greater than 0.05 dB/km shall constitute failure.
6.4 Factory Acceptance Tests
Factory acceptance tests shall be conducted on randomly selected final assemblies of all
equipment to be supplied. Factory acceptance testing shall be carried out on OPGW Cable
and associated hardware & fittings, Approach Cable, Joint Box, FODP, SDH Equipments,
associated line & tributary cards, Termination Equipments ( Drop/Insert, DACS, associated
Subscriber Line Interface Cards etc), Network Management System, radio equipment, DCPS,
Battery etc. and all other items for which price has been identified separately in the Bid Price
Schedules.
Material shall not be shipped to the Employer until required factory tests are completed
Section-06
Page 29 of 42

satisfactorily, all variances are resolved, full test documentation has been delivered to the
Employer, and the Employer has issued Material Inspection & Clearance Certificate (MICC).
Successful completion of the factory tests and the Employer approval to ship, shall in no way
constitute final acceptance of the system or any portion thereof. These tests shall be carried
out in the presence of the Employer's authorised representatives unless waival for witnessing
by Employers representatives is intimated to the contractor.
Factory acceptance tests shall not proceed without the prior delivery to and approval of all
test documentation by the Employer.
The factory acceptance test shall demonstrate the technical characteristics of the equipment in
relation to this specifications and approved drawings and documents. List of factory
acceptance tests for Fibre Optic Transmission system, Termination Equipment Sub-system ,
NMS, DCPS and Battery are given in specified Tables in this section. This list of factory
acceptance tests shall be supplemented by the Contractor's standard FAT testing program.
The factory acceptance tests for the other items shall be proposed by the Contractor in
accordance with technical specifications and Contractor's (including Sub-Contractor's /
supplier's) standard FAT testing program. In general the FAT for other items shall include at
least: Physical verification, demonstration of technical characteristics, various operational
modes, functional interfaces, alarms and diagnostics etc.
For Test equipment & clock, FAT shall include supply of proper calibration certificates,
demonstration of satisfactory performance, evidence of correct equipment configuration and
manufacturers final inspection certificate/ report.
6.4.1
Sampling for FAT
From each batch of equipment presented by the Contractor for Factory acceptance testing, the
Employer shall select random sample(s) to be tested for acceptance. Unless otherwise agreed,
all required FAT tests in the approved FAT procedures, shall be performed on all samples.
The Sampling rate for the Factory acceptance tests shall be minimum 10% of the batch size
(minimum 1) for all items. The physical verification shall be carried out on 100% of the
offered quantities as per the approved FAT procedure. In case any of the selected samples
fail, the failed sample is rejected and additional 20% samples shall be selected randomly and
tested. In case any sample from the additional 20% also fails the entire batch may be
rejected. In case a number of equipments are required for demonstration of the performance
of any equipment during FAT, the sample size shall be taken as that number of equipments
which are necessary to demonstrate the performance, irrespective of the percentage.
For the OPGW/Aerial cable hardware fittings & accessories, the minimum sampling rate, and
batch acceptance criteria shall be as defined in IS 2486.
The Sampling rate for the Factory acceptance tests shall be 10% of the batch size (minimum
2) for FO cable drums, FODPs, Joint box and other similar items.
Since FAT testing provides a measure of assurance that the Quality Control objectives are
being met during all phases of production, the Employer reserves the right to require the
Contractor to investigate and report on the cause of FAT failures and to suspend further
Section-06
Page 30 of 42

testing/ approvals until such a report is made and remedial actions taken, as applicable.
6.4.2
Production Testing
Production testing shall mean those tests which are to be carried out during the process of
production by the Contractor to ensure the desired quality of end product to be supplied by
him. The production tests to be carried out at each stage of production shall be based on the
Contractors standard quality assurance procedures. The production tests to be carried out
shall be listed in the Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP), along with information such as
sampling frequency, applicable standards, acceptance criteria etc.
The production tests would normally not be witnessed by the Employer. However, the
Employer reserves the right to do so or inspect the production testing records in accordance
with Inspection rights specified for this contract.
6.4.3
FAT of Communication Equipments

Table 6-11:
Factory Acceptance Testing for Fibre Optic Transmission System
Item:
Description:
1.
Physical inspection for conformance to DRS, BOQ, drawings and

appearance of equipment
2.
Optical output power
3.
Transmitter lightwave spectral analysis
4.
Low receive level threshold
5.
Generation of bit error rate curve
6.
Measurement of analog and digital service channel parameters as well as

service channel functionality
7.
Performance of supervision, alarm, Craftsperson interface, diagnostics,

loop backs etc.
8.
Electrical interface tests which include: output and input jitter, bit error
rate, pulse shape, cable compensation, and line rate tolerance for
multiplexers
9.
At a minimum tests on Ethernet interface shall include demonstration of

ping test, throughput test, Latency test, Packet Loss test as per RFC 2544
11.
Simulation of failure conditions and failover of each redundant unit.
12.
Test of spare card slots
Section-06
Page 31 of 42

Table 6-11:
Factory Acceptance Testing for Fibre Optic Transmission System
13.
Checks of power supply/converter voltage margins
14.
Random inspections to verify the accuracy of documentation
15.
Test of spare parts/modules/cards as per applicable tests
Section-06
Page 32 of 42

Table 6-12
Factory Acceptance Testing Requirements for Termination Equipment
(MUX & DACS)
Item
Description:
1.
Physical Inspection for conformance to DRS, BOQ, drawings and appearance of

equipment
2.
Performance of supervision, alarm, control and switching systems, diagnostics,

loopbacks, Craftsperson interface etc.
3.
Electrical interface tests which include: output and input jitter, bit error rate, pulse
shape, cable compensation, and line rate tolerance for the channel banks/low-level
multiplexers
4.
Framing, signaling, and operational and maintenance tests consistent with

applicable ITU-T requirements
5.
Simulation of failure conditions and failover of each redundant unit
6.
Test of spare card slots and test of spare parts/modules/cards as per applicable
tests
7.
Checks of power supply/converter voltage margins and short circuit and

overvoltage protection
8.
Random inspections to verify the accuracy of documentation
Table 6-13
FAT on NMS
1
2
3
4
6.4.4
Physical inspection of NMS hardware for conformance to approved BoQ, DRS &
drawing
Test to demonstrate the expansion capability of the NMS system
Test to demonstrate the functionality of North bound interface
Testing of NMS to demonstrate proper operation of all functions: Configuration
Management, Performance Management, Fault Management and Security
Management. All standard features and required customization of the NMS shall be
demonstrated for proper functioning.
FAT/SAT of DCPS
The factory/site tests to be carried out on each DCPS system/module in the factory and
site are listed respectively in Table below.
Section-06
Page 33 of 42

Table-6-14
Lists of tests for FAT/SAT of DCPS
S.No.
Test
Tests on DCPS System

1.
Mechanical & Visual Check Tests
2.
Insulation Test.
3.
High Voltage Withstand Test
4.
Switch On Test
5.
DCPS Low voltage & High voltage limits check Test
6.
Pre-alarm test for Battery Voltage Low
7.
Battery Low Voltage Disconnect Level Test
8.
AC Input Low and High voltage limits check Test
9.
Rectifier Fail Alarm Test
10.
Voltage Regulation Test
11.
Current Sharing Test
12.
Total Output Power Test
13.
Hot Plug In Test ( if applicable )
14.
Calibration & Parameter settings
15.
Automatic Float cum Boost Charge Mode Change Over
Test
16.
Battery Path Current Limiting Test
17.
Battery Charging and full load Current Test
18.
Total Harmonic distortion Test
19.
Burn in Test at 50 C (for 8 hrs duration)
Tests on SMPS module
20
Mechanical & Visual Check Test
21
Module-On Test
22
Input low/high voltage cut-off test
23
Voltage Drop Test
24
Voltage Regulation Test
25
Power Output & Current Limit Test
26
DC High Voltage Test
27
O/P Voltage Ripple Test
28
Psophometric Noise Test
29
Efficiency Test
30
Power Factor
31.
Input Current Limit
32.
Input AC Frequency Range Test
33.
Rectifier Dynamic Response
34.
Output Short Circuit Test
35.
Hold up Time Test
6.4.5
FAT
SAT
Factory Acceptance Tests on Optical Fibre to be supplied with OPGW
The factory acceptance tests listed in table below are applicable for the Optical fibres to be
supplied. The listed tests follow testing requirements set forth in IEEE standard 1138/IEC
60794. The referenced sections specify the detailed test description. The acceptance norm
Section-06
Page 34 of 42

shall be as specified in the above mentioned IEEE standards unless specified otherwise in the
technical specifications.
Table 6-15
Factory Acceptance Tests for Optical Fibres: Optical Tests
S. No.
Test Name
Acceptance Criteria
Test procedure
Attenuation Coefficient
TS Vol II ,Table 2-1(a)
EIA/TIA 455- 78A
Point Discontinuities of
attenuation
TS Vol II, Section

2.1.1.2
EIA/TIA 455-59
Attenuation at Water Peak
TS Vol II ,Table 2-1(a)
EIA/TIA 455- 78A
EIA/TIA 455168A/169A/175A
Core Clad Concentricity Error
EIA/TIA 455-/176
Cladding diameter
EIA/TIA 455-176
Fibre Tensile Proof Testing
EIA/TIA 455-31B
-End of table-
The test report for the above tests for the fibers carried out by the Fiber Manufacturer and
used in the OPGW cables shall be shown to the inspector during OPGW cable FAT and shall
be submitted along with the OPGW cable FAT report.
6.4.6
Factory Acceptance Test on OPGW Cable
The factory acceptance tests for OPGW cable specified below in Table follow the
requirements set forth in IEEE standard 1138 / IEC 60794. The FAT shall be carried out on
10% of offered drums in each lot as specified in technical specifications and the optical tests
shall be carried out in all fibres of the selected sample drums. The Rated Tensile Strength test
shall be carried out on one sample in each lot.
Table 6-16
Factory Acceptance Tests on OPGW
Applicable standard: IEEE 1138 / IEC 60794
S.
No.
Factory Acceptance Test on Manufactured OPGW
Attenuation Co-efficient at 1310 nm and 1550 nm
Point discontinuities of attenuation
Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved

DRS/Drawings
Rated Tensile Strength
Lay Length Measurements
Section-06
Page 35 of 42

6.4.7
Factory Acceptance Test on OPGW Fittings
The factory acceptance tests for OPGW Fittings as specified below in Table 6-17. The
sampling plan shall be as per relevant standard:
Table 6-17
Factory Acceptance Tests On OPGW Fittings
S.
No.
Factory Acceptance Test

Suspension Assembly
UTS/Mechanical Strength of the assembly
Clamp Slip Test

DRS/Drawings
Mechanical strength of each component
Galvanising test
4
5
Tension Assembly
6
Clamp Slip Strength test

DRS/Drawings
Mechanical strength of each component
Galvanising test
8
9
Vibration Damper
10
Galvanising test on damper, masses and messenger wires
11
Damper response (resonant frequencies)
12
Clamp Slip test
13
Strength of messenger wires
14
15
16
17
18
Attachments of weights to messenger cable

Attachments of clamps to messenger cable
Clamp bolt tightening test
Clamp bolt torque test
Dynamic characteristic test
19

DRS/Drawings
Structure Mounting Clamp
14
Clamp fit test
15
Clamp Strength test
16

DRS/Drawings
End of Table
Section-06
Page 36 of 42

6.4.8
Factory Acceptance Test on Approach Cable
The factory acceptance tests for Approach Cable specified below in Table 6-18:
Table 6-18
Factory Acceptance Tests On Approach Cable
S. No.
Attenuation Co-efficient at 1310 nm and 1550 nm
Point discontinuities of attenuation

DRS/Drawings
6.4.9
Factory Acceptance Test on Splice Enclosure (Joint Box) /FODP
The factory acceptance tests for Splice Enclosures/FODP as specified below in Table:
Table 6-19
Factory Acceptance Tests on Splice Enclosures (Joint Box)/FODP
S. No.
Visual check of Quantities and Specific Component Number for each component
of Splice Enclosure/FODP and dimensional checks against the approved drawings.
6.4.10 Factory Acceptance Test on Test Equipment, Pigtail & other items
As per technical specification and approved DRS/Documents.
6.5 Site Acceptance Tests
The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all equipment & test equipment
supplied in this contract for site tests and inspection as required by the Employer. All
equipment shall be tested on site under the conditions in which it will normally operate.
The tests shall be exhaustive and shall demonstrate that the overall performance of the
contract works satisfies every requirement specified. At a minimum Site Acceptance Testing
requirement for FO cable, Telecom equipment, NMS etc. is outlined in following section.
This testing shall be supplemented by the Contractor's standard installation testing program,
which shall be in accordance with his quality plan(s) for FO & Telecom equipment
Section-06
Page 37 of 42

installation. The tests to be conducted during SAT of Battery & DCPS are specified in
respective Tables in this section.
During the course of installation, the Employer shall have full access for inspection and
verification of the progress of the work and for checking workmanship and accuracy, as may
be required. On completion of the work prior to commissioning, all equipment shall be tested
to the satisfaction of the Employer to demonstrate that it is entirely suitable for commercial
operation.
6.5.1
Minimum Site Acceptance Testing Requirement for FO Cabling
Prior to installation, every spooled fibre optic cable segment shall be tested for compliance
with the Pre-shipment data previously received from the manufacturer. This requirement will
preclude the installation of out of specification cable segments that may have been damaged
during shipment.
6.5.1.1 Phases of Site Acceptance Testing
SAT shall be carried out link by link from FODP to FODP. SAT may be performed in parts
in case of long links.
The tests, checks, adjustments etc conducted by the Contractor prior to offering the
equipment for SAT shall be called Pre-SAT activities. The Pre-SAT activities shall be
described in the installation manuals and Field Quality Plan documents.
Sag and tension of OPGW shall generally be as per approved sag-tension chart and during
installation, sag and tension of OPGW shall be documented. Upon completion of a
continuous cable path, all fibres within the cable path shall be demonstrated for acceptance of
the cable path. Fibre Optic cable site testing minimum requirements are provided in Table 620(a) through 6-20(c) below.
Table 6-20(a)
Fibre Optic Cable Pre-Installation Testing
Item:
Description:
1.
Physical Inspection of the cable assembly for damage
2.
Optical fibre continuity and fibre attenuation with OTDR at 1550 nm
3.
Fibre Optic Cable length measurement using OTDR

Table 6-20(b)
Fibre Optic Cable Splicing Testing
Item:
Section-06
Description:
Page 38 of 42

1.
Per splice bi-directional average attenuation with OTDR
2.
Physical inspection of splice box/enclosure for proper fibre / cable routing

techniques
3.
Physical inspection of sealing techniques, weatherproofing, etc.
Table 6-20(c)
Fibre Optic Cable Commissioning Testing
Item:
1.
2.
Description:
End to End (FODP to FODP) bi-directional average attenuation of each fibre at
1310 nm and 1550 nm by OTDR.
End to End (FODP to FODP) bi-directional average attenuation of each fibre at
1310 nm and 1550 nm by Power meter.
3.
Bi-directional average splice loss by OTDR of each splice as well as for all
splices in the link (including at FODP also).
4.
Proper termination and labelling of fibres & fibre optic cables at FODP as per
approved labelling plan.
-End of Table-
6.5.2
Phases for Site Acceptance Testing for Communication Equipments
The SAT shall be completed in following phases:

6.5.2.1 Installation Testing
The field installation test shall be performed for all equipment at each location. If any
equipment has been damaged or for any reason does not comply with this Specification, the
Contractor shall provide and install replacement parts at its own cost and expense.
In the installation test report, the Contractor shall include a list of all hardware or components
replaced or changed between the completion of factory tests and the start of field tests and
show that documentation and spare parts have been updated.
The minimal installation testing requirements for fiber optic transmission subsystem,
Termination equipment sub-system and NMS are provided in respective Tables in this
section.
6.5.2.2 Link Commissioning Tests
Section-06
Page 39 of 42

The commissioning tests shall verify that communication can be performed over the fiber
optic link under test. Delay measurement, Bit Error measurements & service channel
performance monitoring shall be made on the fibre optic links to verify compliance with
designed link performance.
For Ethernet interface: At a minimum the following test requirements shall be demonstrated
as per RFC 2544:
a) Ping test
b) Throughput test
c) Latency test
d) Packet Loss
10% of the total links (Chosen by the Employer, generally to cover links from all
configurations used) shall be tested for a duration of 12 Hours.
Rest of the links shall be tested for 1 Hour. In case a link does not meet the performance
requirements during 1 hour, then the duration of the test shall be increased to 12 hours.
In case any link does not meet the performance requirements during 12 hour, then the cause
of failure shall be investigated and the test shall be repeated after rectifying the defects.
This phase of testing shall be conducted by the Contractor and witnessed by the Employer.
Field adjustments shall be made to meet established standard, however if the field
adjustments fail to correct the defects the equipments may be returned to the Contractor for
replacement at his own expense. In case any adjustments are required to be made during the
interval of the test then the test shall be repeated.
6.5.2.3 Integrated Testing
Prior to commencement of integrated testing the overall system shall be configured as
required to provide all the data and voice channel required to interconnect the various control
centres and RTU. The integrated testing for a batch shall include end-to-end testing of backbone network included in that batch. Integrated testing for last batch shall include testing of
the entire back-bone. The intent of integrated testing is to demonstrate that the equipment is
operational end to end under actual conditions, that all variances identified during factory and
field installation and communications testing have been corrected, and that the
communication equipment is compatible with other equipment at all locations. The Integrated
System Test shall include all fibre optic transmission equipment, termination equipment, the
network management subsystem and other components.
At a minimum the following tests shall be included in the integrated testing :
(1)
(2)
Section-06
Installation testing for NMS as per tables below

Equipment configuration shall be checked to establish that it supports the
channel routing.
Page 40 of 42

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
End to end testing of all individual voice circuits originating from PLCC,
PABX or Phones and to establish proper interfacing with
PLCC\PABX\Phones and to demonstrate proper operation of channels over
wideband systems. Operation shall be checked in terms of quality of voice,
call initiation and call termination processes.
End-to-end testing of all individual Data Circuits originating from PLCC,
RTU and SCADA Front Ends and to establish proper interfacing with
PLCC\RTU\Front End and to demonstrate proper operation of channels over
wideband systems. Operation shall be checked in terms of monitoring of
BER/packet loss.
Testing of NMS to demonstrate proper operation of all functions:
Configuration Management, Performance Management, Fault, Management
and Security management. All the standard features of the NMS shall be
demonstrated for proper functioning.
Demonstration of Protection switching and synchronization of equipment as
per synchronization plan.
Table 6-21
Fibre Optic Transmission system Installation Testing
Item:
Description:
1.
Physical Inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and

appearance of equipment and cabling
2.
Station power supply input and equipment power supply (DC-DC converter)
output voltage measurements
3.
Terminal transceiver performance testing (Tx power, Tx spectrum, receive

signal strength, connector losses etc.)
4.
Service channel performance
5.
Craftsperson interface, alarm and control functional performance
6.
Rack and local alarms: No alarms shall be present and all alarms shall be
demonstrated to be functional
7.
Network management interface and supervision performance
8.
Correct configuration, level setting & adjustments and termination of Input/

output interfaces
9.
Proper establishment of Safety and signalling earthing system and resistance to

ground to be checked.
10.
Simulation of failure conditions and failover of protected components.

Table 6-22
Termination Equipment Sub-system Installation Testing
Item:
1.
Section-06
Description:
Physical Inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and
appearance of equipment and cabling
Page 41 of 42

2.
Table 6-21
Fibre Optic Transmission system Installation Testing
Power supply/converter voltage measurements
3.
Muldem performance testing
4.
Craftsperson interface, alarm and control functional performance
5.
Rack and Local alarms
6.
Network management interface and supervision performance
7.
Channel performance
8.
Safety and signalling earthing system
9.
Simulation of failure conditions and failover of protected components.

Table 6-23
NMS Installation Testing
Item:
Description:
1.
Physical inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and appearance

of equipment and cabling
2.
Workstation hardware inventory, configuration and characteristics
3.
Demonstration of proper operation of all hardware, including workstations

peripherals
----------------------------------------------End of this Section-------------------------------------------
Section-06
Page 42 of 42

Section-07
Training and Support Services
Index
7.1
Training --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
7.1.1
System Design & Overview Training ------------------------------------------------------ 2
7.1.2
Supervision, Maintenance and Installation Crew Training at Site --------------------- 3
7.1.3
Fibre Optic cable Installation and Maintenance Training ------------------------------- 3
7.1.4
Installation & Maintenance Training of Communication Equipment & DCPS ----- 4
7.1.5
Network Management Training ------------------------------------------------------------ 4
7.1.6 Training Course Requirements ------------------------------------------------------------- 5

7.1.6.1 Class Size------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
7.1.6.2 Training Schedule -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
7.1.6.3 Manuals and Equipment------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
7.2
Support Services ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
7.2.1
Technical Support ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
7.2.2
Contractor's Future Hardware/Software Changes ---------------------------------------- 6
7.3
Spare Parts and Test Equipment ----------------------------------------------------------------- 7
7.3.1
Mandatory Spare Parts ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
7.3.2
Recommended Spare Parts List ------------------------------------------------------------- 7
7.3.3
Test Equipment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
7.4
System Maintenance------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
7.4.1
Warranty Period ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
7.4.2
Contractors Maintenance Responsibility ------------------------------------------------- 9
7.5
Miscellaneous Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Section-07
Page 1 of 30

Section-7
Training and Support Services
This section describes the requirements for Contractor-supplied training, support services, and
maintenance of the FOTS, Terminations equipments sub-systems, Network Management System,
DCPS & Battery. The intent of the training and support program is to ensure a smooth transfer of
systems and technologies from the Contractor to the Employer/Owner, and to ensure that
Employer/Owner staff are fully trained to operate, maintain and expand the integrated
telecommunication network.
7.1
Training
The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive training program that prepares the
Employer/Owner's personnel for on-site installation support, operation, and maintenance of the
telecommunication network.
Training may be conducted by the Contractor, the Contractor's subcontractors, and/or original
equipment manufacturers (OEMs). The training requirements of this Specification shall apply to
all such courses.
Training courses shall be conducted by personnel who speak understandable English and who are
experienced in instruction. All necessary training material shall be provided by the Contractor.
The training charges quoted by the Contractor shall include training materials and all associated
expenses. However, for all training courses in India or abroad, the travel (e.g., airfare) and per
diem expenses of the participants will be borne by the respective Employer/Owner. For courses
conducted abroad, however, the Contractor shall extend all necessary assistance for making
appropriate lodging arrangement.
Hands-on training shall be with equipment identical to that being supplied to the
Employer/Owner.
The schedule, location and detailed training contents shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Employer/Owner for approval.
7.1.1 System Design & Overview Training
This training shall provide a functional description of the telecommunication subsystems for both
fibre optic transmission system and Termination equipment system and a discussion of the
failover and alternate routing schemes inherent in the configuration. The training shall include an
overview of the network configuration and indicate the functional responsibilities of all major
subsystems including the network monitoring system hardware and software. The training shall
highlight all significant methodologies or concepts utilized by the hardware and software to
perform the required functions. High-level hardware configuration block diagrams and
network/subnetwork block/flow diagrams shall be included to enhance the understanding of the
overall capability incorporated into all network and sub network equipment.
The training shall be oriented to a user's point of view. The Employer/Owner users will include
Section-07
Page 2 of 30

managers, design & planning personnel, communication support staff and maintenance personnel. As part of the proposal, the Contractor shall identify the number of days deemed appropriate
for this training.
In addition, the contractor shall also provide the training on the DCPS & Battery for the supplied
system. The training shall cover aspects covering installation, testing & commissioning of DCPS
& Battery. Proper emphasis of the training shall be for effective operation & maintenance of
DCPS & Battery on routine & emergency basis by the Employer/Owners personnel.
The overview training shall be customized for the specific functions, features, and equipment
purchased by the Employer/Owner; it shall not be a general presentation of the Contractor' standard
equipment repertoire. Personnel assigned by the Contractor to implement the Employer's system
shall conduct this overview training. The Employer shall review and approve the contents of the
overview training at least four (4) weeks prior to the course.
7.1.2 Supervision, Maintenance and Installation Crew Training at Site
The Installation, Supervision & Maintenance training course shall enable the trainees to
effectively supervise the fibre optic cable installation work from an Employer perspective,
particularly with respect to installation quality checks and safety procedures. The training shall
cover FO cable handling techniques, stringing and installation, jointing & splicing, OTDR use
and OTDR trace analysis, operation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting procedures,
corrective maintenance, and expansion procedures.
It shall also cover an appreciation of restorative procedures required after any likely cable failure
such as cable breaks due to storms or falling trees, installation hardware failures or
misalignments.
Installation crew training shall be predominantly hands-on training courses provided for a group
of persons. The intent of this training is to enable Employer to undertake maintenance &
restoration work in case of cable breaks or other such failures.
The Contractor shall submit for approval a detailed proposal for this training as per the agreed
documentation schedule. The proposal shall include information such as proposed number of
trainees, trainee profile, course duration, training facilities and methodology to be used etc. The
training charges for this training course shall be separately identified in the Bid Price Schedules.
7.1.3 Fibre Optic cable Installation and Maintenance Training
There shall be installation & maintenance training for Fibre Optic cable & associated items.
The installation & maintenance trainings shall enable the Employer to be self-sufficient in
preventive & restorative maintenance of the Fibre Optic cable & associated items purchased by
the Employer. The training courses shall cover Fibre Optic cable & associated items installation,
testing & commissioning, preventive maintenance, diagnostic tools and troubleshooting procedures, corrective maintenance for Fibre Optic cable. The courses shall provide theoretical
background and extensive hands on experience.
Section-07
Page 3 of 30

7.1.4 Installation & Maintenance Training of Communication Equipment & DCPS

There shall be separate modules of the installation & maintenance training for the following
systems:
(1)
(2)
(3)
FO Transmission System Training

Termination Equipment System Training
DCPS & Battery System
The installation & maintenance trainings shall enable the Employer/Owner to be self-sufficient in
preventive & restorative maintenance of the respective communications subsystems purchased by
the Employer/Owner. The training courses shall cover equipment installation, testing &
commissioning, operation, interfaces and cabling between equipment, preventive maintenance,
diagnostic tools and troubleshooting procedures, corrective maintenance, and expansion
procedures for all equipment. The courses shall provide theoretical background and extensive
hands on experience.
Courses shall include equipment adjustments, board-level troubleshooting and repair and, where
appropriate, component-level troubleshooting and repair. Course participants shall operate actual
equipment and diagnose and repair simulated failures.
7.1.5 Network Management Training

The Network Management training shall familiarize the Employer/Owners telecommunication
personnel with the concepts and techniques for configuring, programming, maintaining, and
troubleshooting the Contractor supplied NMS and its associated database. The training course
shall provide a thorough understanding of the general design concepts, features, and user interface
requirements for local and remote monitoring of the equipment, as well as procedures for
restoring service after equipment and power failures.
The Network Management training course shall provide the course participants with hands-on
experience using the actual system being supplied. Table 7-1 summarizes the minimal Network
Management training requirements.
Training aids for each course shall include the Operator's User Manual for each type of
equipment. Operator training that is a standard part of the maintenance training will be
applicable.
Section-07
Page 4 of 30

Item:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.1.6
Table 7-1:
Network Management System Training
Description:
Features of the software being supplied
System generation and configuration procedures, including memory allocation,
operating system parameterization, and buffer sizes
Operating system concepts, including resource allocation, priority level
processing, performance monitoring, diagnostic messages, and restoration
procedures.
Concepts and techniques for generating, modifying, and saving database, CRT
displays, and reports
Utilities, techniques, and equipment used for editing, debugging, testing,
integrating, expanding and documenting new programs and subsequent
implementation in software and/or firmware.
Training Course Requirements
This section describes general requirements that apply to all training courses. The Contractor
shall submit the training proposal along with the bid. The training content, schedule and location
shall be finalised during project execution.
7.1.6.1
Class Size
The Employer/Owner plans to send a number of participants to the training courses for a
specified duration as described in Appendices.
7.1.6.2 Training Schedule
The Contractor shall provide training in a timely manner that is appropriate to the overall project
schedule. All training courses shall be available to the Employer/Owner for a minimum of five
years after final acceptance of the communication system.
The training courses shall be scheduled so that an individual trainee could attend every course.
The training shall be completed prior to the start of installation at site.
The Contractor shall take the above requirements into account in developing the preliminary
training schedule. Contractor shall develop a final training schedule in consultation with the
Employer/Owner after contract award.
7.1.6.3
Manuals and Equipment
The Contractor, subcontractor, or OEM shall prepare training manuals and submit them to the
Employer for review at least one month prior to the start of training. The training manuals shall
be prepared specifically for use as training aids; reference manuals, maintenance manuals, and
user's manuals may be used as supplementary training material. Principal documents used for
Section-07
Page 5 of 30

training shall be tailored to reflect all the Employer requirements specified.

Each course participant shall receive individual copies of training manuals and other pertinent
material at least two weeks prior to the start of each course. The Employer/Owner shall retain the
master and two additional copies of all training manuals and materials as reference
documentation. A complete set of instructor's manuals and training aids shall also be provided.
Upon completion of each course, instructor's manuals, training manuals, and training aids shall
become the property of the Employer. As part of the delivered system documentation and the
final documentation, the Contractor shall supply the Employer with all changes and revisions to
the training manuals and other training documentation. The Employer reserves the right to copy
all training manuals and aids for use in the Employer-conducted training courses.
The Contractor shall furnish for use during training courses all special tools, equipment, training
aids, and any other materials required to train course participants.
7.1.6.4
Specialisation Certificates
The trainees shall undergo performance evaluation tests during the courses. The Contractor is
required to provide certificates to individual trainees, providing the list of activities for which
he/she has been trained.
7.2 Support Services
Throughout design, implementation, factory testing, and field installation and testing, the
Contractor shall supply consulting assistance, as required by the Employer for site preparation,
field installation, and other areas where technical support may be required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for minor facility renovation, and maintenance of the
supplied system up to and including successful completion of the Site Acceptance Test.
After final acceptance of the communications equipment, the Contractor shall offer continuing
technical support and spare parts for the communications equipment for the designed life of the
equipment or 7 years after the declaration of withdrawal of equipment from production
whichever is earlier. However the termination of production shall not occur prior to Operational
Acceptance of the system by the Employer.
7.2.1
Technical Support
Consultation with Contractor's technical support personnel and trained field service personnel
shall be readily available on a short-term/long-term basis to assist the Employer personnel in
maintaining, expanding, and enhancing the telecommunication network upon expiration of the
warranty period. The Contractor shall include in their offer(s), a proposal for ensuring continued
technical support as stated above.
7.2.2
Contractor's Future Hardware/Software Changes
The Employer shall be informed of all alterations or improvements to the hardware supplied
Section-07
Page 6 of 30

under this Specification. The Employer shall be placed on the Contractor's mailing list to receive
announcements of the discovery, documentation, and solution of hardware/software problems as
well as other improvements that could be made to supply equipment. The service shall begin at
the time of contract award, and shall continue for 10 years. The Contractor shall also include a
subscription to the hardware subcontractors' change notification service from the time of contract
award through the warranty period, with a Employer renewable option for extended periods.
7.3
Spare Parts and Test Equipment
The spare parts and test equipment shall be provided for each subsystem as described below.
7.3.1 Mandatory Spare Parts
Appendices provides the Mandatory Spare Parts Requirements described in subsystem sets.
The mandatory spare parts table represents the minimum spares the Contractor shall be
required to supply. The subsystem set of spare parts is defined to include all equipment
modules, subunits and parts required to effect replacement, repair and restoration to full
operational status of a defined unit of a subsystem (i.e. SDH equipment, Primary Mux,
Drop/Insert, DACS etc.)
7.3.2 Recommended Spare Parts List
The bidder shall propose a comprehensive spare parts strategy. The intent of the spare parts
strategy is to ensure a readiness against unforeseen cabling system breakdown; and to carry
out replacement maintenance of susceptible or failed components. Consistent with the
proposed spare parts strategy, the bidder shall provide a list of Recommended Spare Parts,
which may be required over and above the spares listed in Mandatory Spare parts list to
support system availabilities specified in specifications during a one year period. This list of
spares shall be called the "Recommended Spare Parts List".
The Recommended spare parts list shall not be considered for evaluation and may be
included in the final scope of supply. The Bid shall include the following minimum
information for the recommended spare parts:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Original manufacturer and part number

Name and Description
Either theoritical or empirical MTBF of the unit
Number of units in each set
Total number of sets to be provided per Employer/Owner
The unit as well as set prices shall be provided for each subsystem set item of the spare parts
list in the appropriate Bid Price Schedule.
7.3.3 Test Equipment
Appendix-B provides mandatory test equipment requirements, to be provided. The parameters /
features of the mandatory equipments are enumerated in Table 7.2 below:
Section-07
Page 7 of 30

Table 7.2
S.No.
A.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B.
1
2
3
4
Test equipment
Parameter
Test Equipments for OPGW cable

OTDR (Optical Time Domain
Equivalent to Anritsu MW9076B1 or better.
Reflectometer) for 1310/1550 nm with
laser source.
Optical Attenuators (variable
Equivalent to JDSU OLA55 or better.
1310/1550nm).
Optical Power meter (1310/1550nm) with Equivalent to JDSU OLP55 or better
Laser Source.
Equivalent to JDSU OTS55 or better.
Optical Talk set.
Optical Fibre Fusion Splicer incl. Fibre
Equivalent to Sumitomo T-39-SE or better.
cleaver
Calibrated Fibre
FISFI-0053-FC-INST or equivalent
Connectorization kit
FIS FI-0053-FF or equivalent
Splice kit
Optical test accessory kit including all
FIS FI-0053-TS-ST or equivalent
necessary connectors, adaptors, cables,
terminations and other items required for
testing
Test Equipments for Communication Equipments
SDH Analyser* with Jitter and Wander Equivalent to Acterna (JDSU) MTS6000 or
better
Options
Equivalent to Trend Communications model
Handheld 2Mbps BER Tester
Tango E1 or better
Equivalent to Fluke287 or better
Digital Multimeter
Ethernet Tester (with dual port, 10/100
Equivalent to Trend Unipro GbE or better
ports Mbps Ethernet option, layer-1 &
layer-2 functionality )
Note: * The testing capacity of SDH analyser shall be provided according to offered SDH equipment
In case the offered make/model of test equipment has multiple options for the parameters, the
option of higher range shall be acceptable. The supplied test equipment shall be suitable for use
in the high EMI/EMC environment. The Contractor shall submit performance certificate for
offered test equipment from at least one customer. The Contractor shall offer only reputed make
test equipment such as Acterna (JDSU)/Trend/Anritsu/ Fluke/Agilent etc.
The Contractor shall provide in their bid, additionally recommended test equipment list necessary
to support specified system outage requirement. These lists shall include all relevant technical
descriptions and recommended minimum quantities and maintenance concept. The recommended
test equipment along with the test equipment listed in Appendix may be included in the final
Section-07
Page 8 of 30

scope of supply and the price thereof shall not be considered for evaluation.
7.4
System Maintenance
As per DoT guidelines, operation and maintenance of the network shall be entirely by Indian
engineers and dependence on foreign engineers shall be minimal within a period of two years
from the date of LoA. The contractor shall be responsible to maintain the confidentiality of the
Employers System Information that Employer shares with the contractor for maintenance period.
7.4.1 Warranty Period
The one year period commencing immediately after the operational acceptance is called the
Warranty Period/Defect liability Period. In addition to the responsibilities covered under Vol-I
Condition of Contracts during Defect Liability Period, the Contractor shall also be responsible for
maintenance of the Fibre Optic Transmission System, Termination Equipment, NMS, DCPS &
Battery etc. supplied under this Package. The specification for the maintenance of the system
after Operational Acceptance is enclosed at Annexure-I.
7.4.2 Contractors Maintenance Responsibility
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out Comprehensive Maintenance of the
Communication System (excluding FO cabling) for a period of six years excluding warranty
period ensuring the successful operation of the system. The Contractor shall be responsible for
achieving the system availability and the response time mentioned in technical specifications.
The bidder shall quote the Annual Maintenance Charges for six years after Warranty Period
which shall be considered in the bid evaluation. Bidder shall submit the detailed procedure for
achieving above in the bid. The specification for the maintenance of the system is enclosed at
Annexure-I. Upon expiry of the six years AMC period Employer may, at its discretion, extend
this Maintenance for two (2) additional years at the same terms and conditions.
7.5
Miscellaneous Supplies
The Contractor shall provide all required consumable and non-consumable supplies necessary
to support all installation and test activities through final operational acceptance. However, if
there are any problems in the SAT and additional consumables are required, the same shall
also be supplied by the Contractor free of cost.
Section-07
Page 9 of 30

Technical Specifications for Maintenance after operational acceptance during

maintenance period
A -1.0 GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for comprehensive maintenance of the all the
communication equipment, DCPS & Battery system supplied & installed under this
Contract. The maintenance contract shall commence after completion of the project i.e.
after Operational Acceptance. Communication network & BOQ is given in Appendices.
There may be some variation during detailed engineering. Contractor shall meet system
availability of 99.9% for fibre optic system . Contractor will have to make their own
assessment of the network and deploy manpower accordingly. However, it is to be
ensured that specified manpower of requisite qualification are deployed. Availability
calculation shall be done separately for Fibre Optic System.
Contractors maintenance engineer/service engineer shall have minimum qualification of
graduate in Computer or IT or Electronics & Telecommunication with minimum one year
experience or Diploma with three years maintenance/testing & commissioning experience
on the equipment proposed to be supplied & installed. The Degree/Diploma must be
recognised Indian professional qualification. This staff shall be supported by head office
technical staff for restorative problem or other assistance as may be required.
Maintenance engineer shall have technical background and trained in first & second level
maintenance on the supplied communication system, DCPS & Battery and NMS system
of their own without technical assistance from Head Office.
Contractor will arrange for adequate transportation for their staff as per the work demand.
Contractors staff (at all locations) should be equipped with necessary tool kits, mobile
phones, vehicle etc.
The Maintenance of the system supplied & installed by the Contractor shall be
comprehensive and all the spares required during maintenance period shall be provided
by the Contractor at no additional to Employer.
A - 1.1 RESOURCE DEPLOYMENT
In order to cover the entire network, it is imperative that Contractors maintenance
engineers are strategically located so as to reach the site within shortest possible time
frame. Thus a minimum of three (3) engineers will be deployed at three (3) locations (one
person each at Shillong, Badarpur, Mariyani, this however, does not relieve contractor
from its obligation to maintain required system availability of 99.9% for Fibre Optic
System. Accordingly, Contractor shall asses the actual manpower requirement and place
them suitably at other locations, if required. The exact location for deploying engineer
shall be finalised during detailed engineering. The central control and monitoring of
communication system will be performed from Shillong by means of the centralized
NMS. The other locations will work under the control /instruction of the co-ordinator
located in Shillong.
Section-07
Page 10 of 30

A 1.2 MONITORING
Network will be monitored by POWERGRID through centralized NMS to be located at
Shillong. Network Monitoring Team (NMT), whenever, notices any fault/abnormality in
the system shall notify to the Contractors maintenance Co-ordinator at Shillong, over
phone with an event no. An event report shall be generated by POWERGRID as per the
enclosed formats. On issuance of Event report (may be recorded over phone in case of
non-availability of Contractors representative at Shillong) by NMT, corrective action/s
shall be carried out by Contractors maintenance personnel for rectification. Contractors
representative must report within four (4) hours at locations where Contractors engineers
are stationed and within reasonable time at all other location which shall in no case
exceed more than 12 hours (including travel time). Time mentioned here is irrespective of
normal working hours or holidays. The NMT shall co-ordinate and control any site visits
to ensure that communication network is operating with a minimum of disruption during
these visits. The NMT will inform the relevant POWERGRID/constituent to facilitate the
access to the site/equipment where fault is suspected.
The main responsibilities of the POWERGRIDs Network Monitoring Team are:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Communication Network monitoring through Network Management System (NMS)

Detect faults, prioritizing them and notifying to the Contractor for immediate
corrective actions.
Follow up on corrective actions to verify that the agreed time frames are met.
Record all faults in the fault record sheet and summary of action taken for fault
rectifications.
Co-ordinate all planned / breakdown site visits to minimize disturbance of service.
Update status information of operated network to users communication network.
A 1.3 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance activities are either Event Based (Fault/breakdown maintenance,) or
planned site visits (Semi annual site visit, testing of channel/s, augmentation and
modification in the network if end equipment for data/speech does not communicate
with corresponding equipment as and when required. Planned visits shall mainly carried
out during working days.
Event based work is to be carried out round the clock seven days a week, A start status
shall be jointly filled by POWERGRID & Contractors representative at 10.00 Hrs of
commencement date of maintenance contract.
Planned site visits shall be carried out twice in a year (semi-annually) at all the sites in the
network or time to time if speech/data is affected at a particular site. Thus, in a year, not
less than two planned site visits to all locations will be undertaken.
Contractor will maintain record of events during the maintenance services ;
simultaneously POWERGRID/Constituent shall also record the events in the LOG
BOOK available in the NMS control room.
Section-07
Page 11 of 30

The tasks during the planned site visits for the system include but are not limited to
following:
Visual inspection of equipment

Alarm measurement verification
Status report of site
Updating of log records
Cleaning the equipment
Tightening of connectors
Sealing of cabinets to arrest entry of rodents etc.
Measurement of earth resistance
Work to be taken up during semi-annual site visits is given in enclosed Format.

Fault/Breakdown maintenance is a process of fault correction / trouble
shooting/interfacing with other contractor (for data & Speech connectivity of existing
RTUs & EPABXs etc.) as per the fault reported by NMT. Contractor will maintain a log
of activities carried out at all locations and necessary History will include site name, visit
date, actions taken and site condition. Detailed report in this respect shall be submitted by
the contractor in the monthly meeting.
The representatives of POWERGRID/ Constituents will associate in trouble shooting,
change of unit as per programme notified/intimated by the contractor however, due to any
reason if POWERGRID/ Constituents cannot depute their representative, contractor will
proceed for the work so as to attend the breakdown/testing as per their programme.
The scope of corrective maintenance is as follows:
Troubleshooting on a network element and its interfaces as and when required

and directed by NMT, engineer/coordinator of POWERGRID.
Diagnostics on interfaces to locate problems in network elements. If required, the
contractor shall depute maintenance engineer for joint inspection with other
vendors for pin-pointing the fault.
Identification of the faulty hardware unit, replacing it.
Performance of function verification in co-ordination with the NMT operators
Handing over of faulty unit to constituent/POWERGRID at site or RLDC.
MAINTENANCE OF DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

(DCPS includes charger, Batteries, DCDB and other associated cables/connectors,
Meters, relays,switches, surge protection devices etc.)
The Contractor shall carry out both preventive and break down maintenance of the
supplied DCPS & Battery System.
Section-07
Page 12 of 30

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

This consists of necessary measures to maintain the equipment in the proper operating
condition. Preventive maintenance includes functional checking, cleaning and necessary
repair/replacement/adjustments etc. It will be carried out quarterly at mutually agreed
dates.
Break Down Maintenance
Break Down Maintenance is to be carried out in the event of malfunctioning of DCPS
equipment, which blocks the normal operation of the DCPS. Break down maintenance
includes faultfinding, repair or replacement of defective parts and functional checking.
Immediately on noticing the fault, the fault will be reported by the
constituent/POWERGRID on phone to the contractor. The fault reporting time on phone
shall be taken as reference time for the purpose of RT and TAT.
(RT is Response Time when contractors person report at site after reporting of fault in system. TAT is
Turn-Around-Time when system is brought back in service after necessary rectification/replacement works.
A 1.4 HARDWARE SERVICES

In case any failure or malfunction is discovered, the maintenance team shall identify the
problem, organise to promptly attend the fault, replace the faulty equipment/card/module or
any other hardware component with a spare unit and ship the faulty unit to specified location.
Each faulty unit shall be accompanied with correctly filled-out Event Report. Contractor
shall ensure maximum utilisation of the channel capacity, hence healthy channel/s will be put
in use and hardwired to respective DDF/MDF point, in coordination with POWERGRID,
without disturbing end user (PABX,PLCC, RTU ) connection so that outright replacement of
card is avoided. Card shall be replaced when all the healthy channels are faulty. Necessary
modification (temporary) in drawing/s in site copy and at CPCC/NMS location/SLDCs will
have to be done without changing in original document.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all the spares (cards/modules/accessories
etc.) for supplied & installed equipment such as SDH, MUX, DCPS, Battery, NMS etc. The
spares shall be provided/arranged by the contractor at no extra cost to Employer. For early
restoration during the emergency condition, if spares are made available by Employer, the
same shall have to be replenished by the Contractor within thirty (30) days.
Contractors hardware services shall also cover support for the NMS hardware & Software
supplied to POWERGRID as part of the Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for
providing spares for the supplied NMS system, if required, during maintenance period at no
additional cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall provide support within four (4) hours of
fault reporting at Shillong site and the next day for all other outstation sites after logging in
of the faults.
Contractor will carry out the following tasks for hardware services:
Section-07
Page 13 of 30

a) Handover the faulty unit/s to Employer

b) Replace faulty units from their own spares stock.
c) Send faulty units to Original equipment suppliers representative in India on Employer
behalf with the correctly completed Failure Report with site information and symptoms of
failure.
d) Test the repaired unit for their healthiness after the same is rectified by the original
manufacturer.
A 1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICES SUMMARY
The Maintenance Services are summarised below:
ON SITE SUPPORT / MAINTENANCE
Scope
Three Engineers + One Co-ordinator
Availability
On all working days of week except on Sundays & holidays during
office hours. After office hours / Holidays, duty phone to be
contacted (with co-ordinator)
Task
Troubleshooting & Fault rectification
MAINTENANCE FAULT/BREAKDOWN
Equipment Scope
As per BoQ enclosed in Appendices
Scope
Rectification /Corrective maintenance
Availability
On call basis as mentioned above in TS
PLANNED SITE VISIT
Equipment Scope
Scope
Availability
As per BoQ enclosed in Appendices

Visual inspection of equipment, alarms measurement verifications,
status report of site, updating of log record, cleaning the
equipment, modification & augmentation
Semi-annual / planned visits
A 1.6 OUTAGE TIME DEFINITION:

An outage time refers to period in which loss of communication is detected on any part of the
telecommunication network / equipment and continues until the fault is cleared by taking into
account conditions listed below.
a) Time of unavailability excludes running with faulty equipment on specific instruction
from POWERGRID/Constituent (not affecting communication or monitoring of other
units other than faulty unit).
b) The time of unavailability excludes the transportation time to a faulty site average of
twelve (12) hours and time to get authorization for access to the telecommunication
room and to the equipment.
c) An event would not be considered as failure when the system features allow to continue
the data/voice transmission utilizing redundancies available in the subsystem/equipment.
Section-07
Page 14 of 30

d) In case of failure of any E1, no consequential lower level channel failure shall be
accounted for.
e) In case a loss of communication is detected in system of third party (PLCC/PABX
equipment, RTU/SCADA, existing SDH/PDH equipment procured under separate
contract) and no corresponding alarm is detected in NMS the event will be jointly
studied with the parties and plan/schedule of fault finding will be made. However, under
such conditions of fault attribution to the third party, it would be contractors
responsibility to logically establish such attribution.
f) If it is needed to identify the fault, it is allowed to disconnect/loop circuits for trouble
shootings. This testing time shall not be counted in the outage time calculations.
However, interruption time for healthy channel should not exceed 10 minutes. Proper
planning and coordination with all concerned may be required while carrying out this
activity so as to minimize outage time.
g) Outage due to force majeure conditions ( Not attending fault due to war, curfew,
earthquake at the location of fault, serious accident during traveling for attending fault) or
outage due to failure in power system equipment other than supplied by the Contractor
(or AC/DC).
h) Outages which are not attributable to equipment faults such as fault in fibre optic cable
will not be considered for calculation in system availability.
A 1.7 DOCUMENTATION DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD
Events shall be recorded by using of event form. The forms shall be filled in duly dated, timed
and signed by representatives of both the parties. Absence of one or the other partys
representative shall not render the record invalid but assumes only that such representative signs
the record at his earliest convenience.
The initial condition of the system shall be recorded on the start status form to constitute or
reference for later events. All the events recorded in the start status form shall have to be rectified
within 15 days. Faults not attended within 15 days will be considered as outage. Any and all
events such as incoming and existing alarms, fault occurrence, action taken for remedies etc.
shall be recorded in the event report forms. If a unit is replaced or repaired both the new and the
replaced or repaired unit is to be recorded in the event report form. Contractor shall submit the
detailed report for fault occurrence after the cards/equipment is rectified at the works of supplier.
A 1.8 CALCULATION OF NETWORK AVAILABILITY

The system availability shall be calculated as per following formula during the Maintenance
period.
Availability Calculation Formula.
Section-07
Page 15 of 30

System Availability
Tt*Cht - Chn*Tn x100%

------------------------------------ (n=1 to Cht)
Tt*Cht
Where
SA = System Availability (%)
Tt= Total test time (24* days in a month)
Cht = Total number of channel
Chn = Number of channels affected by event En
Tn = Outage time of event En
The NMS availability for both PDH/SDH shall be calculated as follows:
Availability of NMS(Av).= Tt*NEt - NEn*Tn x 100%
------------------------------------Tt*NEt
Where
Av = NMS Availability(%)
Tt = Total test time(24 * days in a month)
NEt = Total number of network Element
NEn = Number of NE affected by an event
Tn = Outage time of NE
A 1.9 AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENT
The availability of wideband communication equipment shall be measured in categories
as below:
a) Channel (Voice, Asynchronous & Synchronous data circuits and management data
channels)
b) E-1 /Ethernet channels
c) Availability of NMS system
The availability requirement for type of channels for wideband communication
equipment and NMS systems shall be 99.9%.
However not withstanding he commutation of availability of the communication system
as specified above, the prompt restortion of the faulty equipment/part of the network is
also of equal importance and any delay in restoration of the faulty system shall be
goverened as per terms & condition of the contract.
A 1.10 SCOPE OF WORK DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

Sl.no.
Description
Detailed Scope
Overall
Infrastructure includes the building, air conditioners,
Section-07
Page 16 of 30
1.4

Infrastructure
1.1
AC/DC system, UPS, cable trenches, Earthing etc

provided by POWERGRID. They will be maintained by
POWERGRID
Equipment site
1.1.1
General conditions
General checking during semi annual / troubleshooting

site visits and advise
1.1.2
Cleanliness of the
room

site visits and advise.
1.1.3
Earthing
interconnections
Checking, connector cleaning, redoing the connection

during semi annual / troubleshooting site visits (limited
to the earthing of equipment under scope of
maintenance)and as required specifically. Earthing
interconnection will be checked upto earthing star point).
Earthing interconnection shall also be checked and
corrected during troubleshooting site visits if it is
considered the probable cause of fault. Measurement of
earth resistance during semi-annual site visit
1.1.4 Air conditioning

1.1.5
Cable route

1.1.6
EMI issues
Contractor shall study in special case of repeated faults if

the probable cause is earthing interconnection at the
station or possibility of spurious signals through various
cable connections to the wideband equipment and
advise.
1.2
DC system
Site checking (normal output, battery condition, earthing

interconnection) as per approved/agreed format during
semi annual site visits and advise. It shall also be
checked during troubleshooting site visits if it is
considered the probable cause of fault.
1.3
UPS
Checking of output values, earthing interconnection at

the NMS sites during semi annual site visits and advise.
It shall also be checked during troubleshooting site visits
if it is considered the probable cause of fault.
1.4
Interfacing with
others
Checking interfacing with other equipment and take

corrective actions on its MDFs if required. The scope
will be limited to the MDFs where the cables of
wideband communication system have been terminated.
Report and advise on others' if it is the probable cause of
fault.
Section-07
Page 17 of 30

1.5
Indoor cabling
Checking terminations, re-kroning, if necessary, during

semi-annual/troubleshooting site visits. It shall also be
checked during troubleshooting site visits if it is the
probable cause of faults.
1.6
Out-door cabling
Checking terminations, re-kroning, if necessary, during

semi-annual/troubleshooting site visits. It shall also be
checked during troubleshooting site visits if it is the
probable cause of faults.
1.8
Fibre Optic Cable
Checking with OTDR and advice. Rectification if fault is

found to be in the approach cable/patch cord etc. up to
DDF.
Main Equipment
2.1
PDH MUX &

Digital Cross
Connect
Faulty equipment to be replaced at site as per conditions

of Maintenance Plan.
2.2
Fibre Optic
terminal SDH

of Maintenance Plan.
2.3
GPS Clock

of Maintenance Plan. Contractor shall be responsible for
providing hardware , if required, during maintenance
without any additional cost implication to Employer.
2.4
NMS of SDH
2.4.1
Computer hardware Faulty equipment to be replaced at site as per conditions

and Routers
of Maintenance Plan. Comprehensive maintenance with
hardware suppliers to be tied up by the Contractor.
Contractor shall be responsible for providing all
hardware & software required during maintenance
without any additional cost implication to Employer.
2.4.2
Alarm handling,
Backups etc. software part
2.5
NMS of PDH(Mux,
D/I & DACS)
System
2.5.1
Computer hardware Faulty equipment to be replaced at site as per conditions

of Maintenance Plan. Comprehensive maintenance with
hardware supplier to be tied up by the Contractor.
Contractor shall be responsible for providing all
hardware & software required during maintenance
without any additional cost implication to Employer
Section-07
Alarm deletions, Backups as per maintenance plan.

Consumables to be provided by Employer. Software
corruption to be corrected as per actual requirement.
Page 18 of 30

2.5.2
Alarm handling
Backups etc.
software part
Alarm deletions, Backups as per agreed back up plan.

Consumables to be provided by Employer. Software
corruption to be corrected as per actual requirement.
2.5.3
Monitoring and
general operation
of communication
link
Regular monitoring of the communication link

operations through NMS in association with the
Employers staff. Investigations for abnormal behaviour
and take corrective actions.
2.5.4
Provisioning/ Reprovisioning of
channels
As per requirement.
Contractor's set-up Generally in consonance with the set-up mentioned in

the maintenance plan.
4 MAINTENANCE OF DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

(DCPS includes charger, Batteries, DCDB and other associated
cables/connectors, Meters, relays, switches, surge protection devices etc.)
Details of Job to be carried out during Preventive Maintenance
1
2
3
Physical inspection of DCPS at all specified locations

Cleaning of System
Tightening of all the power and control connections including checking the
input power cable terminations at both ends.
4
5
6
7
8
Checking of DC Voltage
Checking for AC Voltage L-L, L-N
Checking AC Current
Checking for ripple Voltage
Functional checking Of DC System For Normal Operation including battery
charging
Checking for Normal operation of each Module
Checking of earthing of the system by measurement of earth to neutral
potential.
Checking of charging condition of the batteries
Checking of the physical conditions of the batteries
Checking of each battery voltage during quarterly visits & battery
impedance/resistance measurement twice during the contract during 2nd & 4th
quarterly visit.
Three discharge tests per year at normal load for three hours during 1st, 2nd and 4th
quarterly visit.
Checking of present load on charger.
Matching of DCPS parameters with SCADA system
Proper guidance to the operation staff for satisfactory working of the equipment
and its proper upkeep.
Checking of battery terminals for corrosion and cleaning thereof, torqueing and
greasing.
9
10
11
12
13
13
14
15.
16.
17.
Section-07
Page 19 of 30

C-3 discharge test on batteries once a year during 3rd quarterly visit.
18.
Above observations shall be recorded as per enclosed format and duly signed at site by
constituent/POWERGRID Engineer.
Details of Job to be carried Break Down Maintenance
1
2
3
4
Repair and replacement of Faulty Module

Repairing and replacement of faulty components in the system
Analysis report of the fault
Plan for preventive measure to arrest recurrence of such faults.
A 4.0 PANELTY FOR DEFAULT IN SERVICES

(a)
Contractor will maintain an adequate level of qualified staff for carrying out this maintenance
contract, failing which Rs 50,000/- per month will be deducted by Employer from the amount
due to contractor under this contract. In addition 5% of the total payable amount shall be
deducted for every fall of 1% or part thereof in the specified availability.
(b)
In addition to above, a penalty of Rs 1000/- per day shall be imposed for not attending the
fault in specified period for all non-communication equipment. For non-communication
equipment maximum allowable restoration time shall be 48 Hrs.
(c)
Employer shall have the right to terminate the contract after giving notice of two month if the
availability of the system is not attained as per specification consecutively for two months.
A 5.0 CO-ORDINATION REQUIREMENTS
A 5.1 MEETING PRACTICE
Regular meeting between POWERGRID and the Contractor is vital for communication and
information flow between these two organisations. The purpose of the meeting is to tackle the
essential issues concerning the services and network performance. The suggested schedule
for meeting is once in every month. The meeting agenda shall be decided between
POWERGRID and Contractor and could for example consist of the following issues:
Section-07
Services and network performance according to the report during last month
Review of emergency situation
Status of spare
Action plan
Next Meeting
Alarms/events unattended till the date of meeting
Page 20 of 30

The following participants should be present in this meeting:
Co-ordinator (Contractor)
Members of the Contractor team as needed
Co-ordinator POWERGRID/Constituents representative
Operation and maintenance staff as designated to attend (POWERGRID)
A 5.2 EMERGENCY MEETING

Whenever a major outage occurs in any part of the network, an emergency meeting may be
called if desired by POWERGRID. In the meeting, the outage will be discussed in the
context of cause, correction and prevention.
A 5.3 REPORTING PROCEDURE
The purpose of report is to summarize the activities performed during the reporting period.
The report provides the information on the performance of the services and describes the
current status of the network. The report is a monthly report from Contractor to
POWERGRID which shows the trends in the network and services provided by the
Contractor. By analysing the report data, management and expert of POWERGRID and
contractor are able to focus attention on the areas where further improvement is needed.
Emergency Reports: Contractor reports to POWERGRID every time the emergencies call up
and call out service is invoked. In these cases, on termination of the emergency all details of
the fault and clearance information are submitted within five working days.
A 5.4 INTERFACE BETWEEN POWERGRID AND CONTRACTOR
Contractor Interfaces
Contractor shall submit detail of personnel deployed in the enclosed format through which all
problems identified by POWERGRID are to be reported to contractor via duty phone
Description
Name
Telephone
Fax
Email
Shillong
Badarpur
Mariyani
Co-ordinator :
Section-07
Telephone no :
Mobile no:
FAX
E-mail address:
No
Page 21 of 30

(Details to be provided later)

Contacts in POWERGRID
Name
Section-07
Responsibility
Phone
number
(Residence)
(mobile)
Phone number
office
Fax number, Email address
Page 22 of 30

Form-I
EVENT REPORT FORM
Event Report No ____________
Station:____________________
Date:____________________
Constituent:_________________
Affected Path:
________________
__________________________________
Fault Description: ______________________________________________

_______________________________________________
A) Event start time (as per NMS)
date _____
time_______
B) Reporting time by NMT
date _____
time_______
REPORT
i) Failure within contractor system
Yes ____
No _______
( If No then date _____
time_______)
ii) Entrance to site and room for rectification date _____
time_______
iii) Rectification start time by Contractor
date _____
time_______
iv) Fault fixed
date _____
time_______
Total Outage time
______________________
Comments:
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Faulty unit Sl. No:___________________________
New Unit Sl. No.: ___________________________
Date:
POWERGRID/CONSTITUENT _______________
Section-07
Contractor_____________
Page 23 of 30

Form-II
START STATUS FORM
Page:
(1)
Report no:
Start: Date :______________
Time : 10.00 Hrs:
Station
Description
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
_____________
_____________________________
10
_____________
_____________________________
Special test conditions or action:
Attachments:
Initials:
POWERGRID ______________
Section-07
Contractor __________
Page 24 of 30

Form-III
FORMAT TO BE FILLED DURING SEMI ANNUAL SITE VISIT

1. SITE INFORMATION:
Site name
:-------------------------------------------------------
Address
:-------------------------------------------------------
Contact Person
:-------------------------------------------------------
Telephone & Fax
:-------------------------------------------------------
2. GENERAL CLEANLINESS
Communication room air conditioner
Is air conditioner on?
Yes/No
Are filters clean?
Yes/No
Is air conditioner cooling O.K?
Action Required by POWEGRID/Constituent------------------------------------
OK/NOT OK
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Communication room cleanliness
Check if communication room is in good condition (Over all)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check if regular cleaning of telecom room done.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check if room is manned.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check if AC/DC sully has been tapped for other uses.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Is the room having any damp wall.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Action required by POWERGRID.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contractors representative
Section-07
POWERGRID/CONSTITUENTSs
representative
Page 25 of 30

Form-III contd/-
EQUIPMENT RACK CLEANLINESS:
Check if cabinets are closed and key available with room in charge.
Key available
Not Available Cabinet Closed Open
Clean the equipment with vacuum cleaner.
Cleaned
Actions required by POWERGRID/Constituent:____________________________

Action required by Contractor:__________________________________________
3.0 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT:
Room temperature
Check the room temperature (25oC is recommended)
_____________
______________
______________
Temperature very near equipment cabinet

Temperature inside the telecom equipment rack
Action Required by POWERGRID/Constituents :_______________________________________

4.0 POWER SUPPLY MEASUREMENT
Input DC Voltage at MCB
Input DC Voltage at Cabinet TB
AC Voltage at the time of station visit (Primary source):
Availability of AC Supply in 24 hours
__________________
Charger Voltage
__________________
Battery Voltage (Charger AC Supply off)
Actions required by POWERGRID/CONSTITUENT
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________
__________________________________________________________________
Section-07
representative
Page 26 of 30

Form-III contd/-
Action required by Contractor
_____________________________
6.0 MULTIPLEXER & SDH EQUIPMENT ALARM CHECK

Visual check for the alarm on Mux & SDH equipment, in case of any alarm present
further investigation and corrective action.
Healthiness of spare Fibre
From
To
Condition
Equipment used
Fibre no:
Colour :
Action required by Contractor:__________________________________

7.0 CABLE CHECK
Check the cable terminations at all MDFs visually. Recrone if any loose wires.
Check cable route for any abnormality.
Are cable trenches covered properly?
8.0 ANTENNA, ANTENNE PIPE SUPPORT, CABLE, TOWER
Check base of tower. It should be clean from plant, grass, and waste material.
Tower antenna should be free from honey bees, bird nests etc
Visual check of antenna for any damage & proper dealing at connector point.
Visual check for cable and connectors.
9.0
representative
DOCUMENTS AND TEST INSTRUMENTS

Check the documents at site.
Section-07
Available
Not available
Page 27 of 30

Form-III contd/
Check the availability of test instrument/tool kit at site.(Multimeter,Screw driver,plier

etc.)
_____________________available
10.0
EARTHING CHECK
All the cables are connected properly with the ground point.
Clean the end points if required while removing the earth cable first put temporary earth
cable. After correction place the original cable and remove loop cable.
Clean star point with sand paper and put petroleum jelly.
Measurement of earth resistance:
Section-07
___________________
representative
Page 28 of 30
ntative

Form -IV
Format
DC POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE FORMAT TO BE FILLED AT SITE
SITE INFORMATION
SITE NAME
: _____________________________________________
ADDRESS
: _____________________________________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TELEPHONE AND FAX NO ------------------------------------------------------
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
a
b
c
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
VALUE,IF ANY
REMARKS
Cleaning done
Power connections checked for tightening &
over heating
Control Connections are all tight
All indications/meters/display on the panel are
working
Input frequency
Rectifier LEDs
Normal Operation on each module
Float voltage
Checking for ripple Voltage
Checking for AC Voltage L-L, L-N
R-Y
Y-B
R-B
Checking AC Current
Checking of DC Voltage
Checking of earthing
Battery voltage/resistance measurement done
& enclosed
Load test done on batteries as enclosed
Check functioning of hooter/Buzzer (Alarm
Annunciation)
Parameters checked in SCADA system
Proper guidance given for normal day to day
operation.
Suggessions from Contractor :
Remarks from Customer :
CONSTITUENT/POWERGRID representative
Section-07
Page 29 of 30

Form-V
CONTRACT NO./DATE :
DESCRIPTION OF JOB :
CONTRACTOR :
BIO-DATA OF CONTRACTORS EMPLOYEES
NAME
AGE :
TRADE :
PHOTO
RESIDENTIAL ADDRESS
TEMPORARY
PERMANENT
LANGUAGES KNOWN
SPEAK
READ
WRITE
QUALIFICATION
TRAINING IN SAFETY
/ HEALTH / ENVIRONMENT
QUALITY/TRADE
JOB EXPERIENCE
DATE:
SIGNATURE:
------------------------------------End of this Section-----------------------------------------------
Section-07
Page 30 of 30

Section-08
Documentation and Deliverables
Index
8.1
System Functional Description Document ----------------------------------------------------- 2
8.2
System Documentation --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
8.3
Supplementary Documentation ------------------------------------------------------------------ 2
8.4
Test Documentation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
8.5
Drawings -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
8.6
Drawing and Document Approval Procedure-------------------------------------------------- 3
8.7
Final Documentation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4
Section-8
Page 1 of 13

Section-08
Documentation and Deliverables
This section describes the documentation requirements and provides a list of deliverable that the
telecommunication system Contractor shall provide to the Employer. Complete documentation
necessary for the operation and maintenance of the communication system is required. All the
documentation shall be provided in hard copy and also on CD-ROMs in full compliance with the
specification. Conditions pertaining to Document Review and Approval Rights and Document
Submission Scheduling are specified in this specification. All documents shall be supplied in
English.
As detailed in subsequent sections the documentation shall include the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
8.1
Detailed list of the deliverables

Description of the products
Technical particulars
Installation manuals
Maintenance manuals
Quality assurance manuals, Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) & Field Quality
Plan (FQP)
Tests (type test, production, FAT, SAT) documentation
System Functional Description Document
The document shall include an overview of the system configuration. This document shall be
designed to serve as a complete introduction to the supplied system and to the more specific
documents that are defined in technical specifications. The document shall be oriented to the
Employer user's point of view and be subject to the Employer's review and approval. Users will
include POWERGRID operating personnel communication support staff and maintenance
personnel.
8.2
System Documentation
A detailed documentation plan and document submission schedule shall be prepared and
submitted for approval. The guidelines specified in table 8-1 and 8-2 shall be followed.
8.3
Supplementary Documentation
If during the training courses or while performing maintenance on such equipment during the
warranty period, the Employer determines that additional information is required to perform the
maintenance function, the Contractor and/or its subcontractors shall provide the specific
supplemental information necessary to perform the maintenance function. This information shall
be documented in a form suitable for incorporation into the appropriate maintenance document.
Section-8
Page 2 of 13

8.4
Test Documentation
The Contractor shall provide documentation for all factory and field tests.
The test documentation shall include the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
8.5
Test Procedure Document

Type test documents
Factory Acceptance Test Documents
Site Acceptance Test Documents
Drawings
All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time of bid shall be in
sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions, material description, Bill of
Materials, weight of each component, break-up for packing and shipment, shipping arrangement
required, the dimensions required for installation and any other information specifically requested
in the Specifications.
Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the Employer name, the
unit designation, the specification title, the specification number and the name of the Project. All
titles, notes, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should
be to the scale and in metric units. The drawing revision level/ issue no, issue date shall be
marked on each drawing and the drawing shall carry issue history information and appropriate
signatures (eg: originator, checker and approving authority).
8.6
Drawing and Document Approval Procedure
The drawings/documents submitted by the Contractor shall be reviewed by the Employer as far as
practicable with in stipulated duration and shall be modified by the Contractor if any
modifications and/or corrections are required by the Employer in compliance with the
Specifications. The Contractor shall incorporate such modifications and/or corrections and
submit the final drawings for approval. Any delays arising out of failure by the Contractor to
rectify the drawings in good time shall not alter the contract completions date.
The drawings/documents submitted for approval to the Employer shall be in triplicate. One print
of such drawings shall be returned to the Contractor by the Employer marked with one of the
categories as listed below:-
Category
Section-8
Inference
Page 3 of 13

Cat I
Approved/Released for implementation.
Cat II
Approved/Released for implementation subject to incorporation of comments.

Revised drawing required.
Cat III
To be resubmitted for approval after incorporating comments.
Cat IV
For information and record.
The approval of the drawing/document conveyed vide above marked copy shall neither relieve
the Contractor of its contractual obligations and its responsibilities towards weights, qualities,
design details, assembly fits, performance particulars and conformity of supplies with the Indian
Statutory Laws as may be applicable, nor shall it limit Employer's right under the contract.
Depending upon the category of approval the Contractor shall resubmit the drawings/documents
for review by Employer after incorporating all corrections.
Further work by the Contractor shall be strictly in accordance with the Cat-I, Cat-II or Cat-IV
approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
Employer.
All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment/material prior to the
approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. The Contractor may make any changes
in the design which are necessary to make the equipment/material conform to the provisions and
intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to approval by the Employer.
Approval of Contractor's drawing or work by the Employer shall not relieve the Contractor of any
of his responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
8.7
Final Documentation
Final documentation shall consist of the documents approved in Cat I and Cat IV listed in table 81. The documents will be used by the Employer personnel for operating and maintaining the
equipment after acceptance.
Until acceptance of the equipment by the Employer, the Contractor shall be responsible for
supplying documentation revisions or changes necessitated by inaccuracies, installation
requirements, omissions determined by usage, and design or production alterations to the
equipment. All changes shall be issued in the form of replacements for the affected drawings,
diagrams, charts, graphs, tables, lists, and pages in the various documentation such that all
documentation describes the equipment "as delivered".
For all CAT-I & CAT-IV approved documents listed in table (except Type, FAT & SAT related),
seven (7) sets of the final approved documentation shall be provided to the Employer in CDROM and two sets in hardcopy.
Section-8
Page 4 of 13

All final Contractor-supplied documentation shall be easily reproducible by the Employer.
Section-8
Page 5 of 13

Table 8-1
Documentation Plan for Communication Equipment Package
S.
No
Document
1.
Documentation
plan & schedule
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Survey
guidelines
Data
Requirement
Sheets (DRS)
and
Guaranteed
Technical
Parameters &
Drawings
Sag Tension
charts
Mechanical
drawings
Equipment
Manuals &
Section-8
Applicable Equipments /
Item
For each and every item to be

supplied including OPGW
Cable, Optical fibre, OPGW
hardware
&
fittings,
Approach cable, Joint Box,
FODP, Primary Mux, D/I,
DACS, SDH equipment,
NMS, DCPS, Battery, power
and signal cables, earthing
cables, patch cords etc
For OPGW cable
As applicable
For all items
Brief Description
Category
of
Approva
l
This document shall contain

the list of all documents to be
submitted for approval and
their
submission/approval
schedule.
As
per
Technical
Specifications
These document(s) shall
describe all the technical
parameters of the equipment
being offered.
Cat-I(for
DRS) &
Cat-IV
(for
brochure)
Shall accompany the DRS

document
This document shall fully
describe the equipment racks/
enclosures, MDF, peripherals
and related hardware with
particular
reference
to
mechanical
construction,
materials and dimensions,
appearance,
mounting
methods, earthing clearances
required from walls/roof/other
panels, cable entry details, dust
and
moisture
ingress
protection provisions etc.
Complete set of all equipment
manuals
(Construction,
Page 6 of 13
IV

Table 8-1
S.
No
Document
Item
Standard
Documents
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Previous type
test reports
For all items for which type

testing is envisaged.
Type test
procedures
Manufacturing
Quality Plan
Type test
schedule

testing is required.
For all items to be supplied
Type test report

For each Fibre Optic link and
site
Link and site

survey reports
& engineering
analysis
Bill of Quantity
Numbering,
Marking,
labeling
Document
Physical
planning/site
preparation
manuals
Section-8

For each items and each line

As applicable.
As applicable.
Brief Description
Category
of
Approva
l
Installation,
Maintenance,
Reference etc) for that product.
A set of product brochures,
photographs etc.
Shall be complete in all respect
including all test graphs,
curves,
calculations,
photographs etc.
Shall be formatted as per the
technical specifications
IV
I
I
Shall indicate the start & finish

data for each test & sequence
of tests if applicable, test labs.
I
I
Link wise survey reports as per

specifications,
link
calculations etc.
I
I
Must include numbering,

marking, labelling and naming
conventions for channels,
cabels, connectors, subracks,
cubicles etc
Must contain data gathered
during the site survey,
including test results, if any.
The document shall also
contain floor plan, cable
trenching/raceway drawings,
station
block
diagrams,
rack/cabinet
elevation
Page 7 of 13

Table 8-1
S.
No
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Document
Item
Channel
Routing
Whole Network
Synchronisation
Plan
Whole Network
Configuration
Diagrams
Whole Network
NMS
Description
Document
NMS
Factory
Acceptance
tests: test plan,
procedures and
report format
For all items to be supplied
21.
Factory
acceptance test
report
For all Factory acceptance

tests
22.
Transportation
& Handling
Procedures
For all items
Section-8
Brief Description
Category
of
Approva
l
drawings, air-conditioning and

power supply requirements,
and power supply distribution
and earthing system details.
E1 level Plan, subscriber voice
and data channels plan for
whole network.
Locations of clocks, depiction
of all interfaces, flow of
sychronising signal.
Network configuration, Link
wise and site wise equipment
configuration,
NMS
configuration.
Functional description of
Hardware, Description of all
commonly used and major
functions in detail, Reference,
User, Maintenance Manuals,
Interfaces
and
channel
requirements and routing,
This document shall include
the list of Site acceptance tests,
the administrative & functional
test plans, test procedures and
formats for recording &
reporting factory acceptance
test results.
IV
Acceptan
ce letter
by
Employer
This document shall describe
the procedures & precautions
to be observed during overseas
& inland transportation,
Page 8 of 13
IV

Table 8-1
S.
No
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Document
Item
Equipment
Installation
manual
FO Cable
Installation
manual
Jointing
Manual
For equipment types: Mux,

D/I, DACS, SDH equipment,
DCPS & Battery etc
OPGW
Site Drawings
Site
wise
documentation
Site Acceptance
tests (SAT) test
plan,
procedures and
report format
Section-8
For each type of

FO
cable/joint box to be supplied
System document
complete
Brief Description
Category
of
Approva
l
equipment handling during

transport, storage & preinstallation. It shall also
include packing details and
package labeling details.
The expected content of this
document are presented in
table below.
The expected content of this
document are presented in
table 10.2 below
the installation of joint box
(splice enclosures) and other
jointing gang activities
This document must include,
general details of equipments,
cubicles, cables, connectors,
MDFs,
DDFs,
network
diagram, earthing connections,
power supply connections and
specific details i.e. site layout,
floor plans, cubicle layout,
sub rack layout, channel
routing, signal connections,
cable routing, MDF and DDF
cross connections etc
This document shall include
the list of Site acceptance tests,
the administrative & functional
test plans, test procedures and
reporting site acceptance test
results. This document shall be
restricted to describing the
acceptance tests listed in this
Page 9 of 13
IV
I

Table 8-1
S.
No
28.
Document
Field Quality
Plan
Item
One Document with multiple

subdocuments if required
Brief Description
Category
of
Approva
l
technical specification, and

other similar tests which shall
be conducted in Employer
presence for Site acceptance.
Field Quality Plan shall
describe the quality control to
be exercised during the field
activities. This document can
include
the
following
information:
(a.) The list of performance &
safety checks applied to
installation equipment, tools &
tackles, checks, check on
physical health & training
records of installation crew
etc.
(b.) The list of Site Acceptance
tests (including statement of
acceptance criteria). The
inclusion of list of site
acceptance tests in FQP is
analogous to the inclusion of
list of FAT in the MQP. The
reporting Site acceptance tests
can also be reproduced
29.
Cat- I
Approach Cable Approach cable
Installation
Document
General
Section-8

the general approaches to be
adopted for installation of
Approach cables, for example
the document shall try to
answer questions such as
whether cable trenches or
cable raceways shall be used?
Or whether any conduits/ ducts
Page 10 of 13

Table 8-1
S.
No
Document
Item
Brief Description
Category
of
Approva
l
will be used, if so, of what

type? etc.
all allowable alternative
installation methodologies,
such
that
the
actual
implementation at a particular
site shall be one or a
combination of the methods
described. The approach
followed at a particular site
shall be described based on
this document in site by site
documentation to be submitted
later.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Approach Cable
& FODP layout For each site
document- site
wise
Training
System document
Manuals
Maintenance
System document
Philosophy &
Procedures
SAT reports
Cat- I
To describe the layout of
approach cable at each site and
the floor plan of the FODP.
An advance copy of all
training material.
Shall
cover
breakdown
maintenance
procedures,
preventive
maintenance
schedules and procedures
IV
IV
Per Link and per location

*
Note*: To be reviewed & approved by site.
Section-8
Page 11 of 13

Table 8-2(a)
Expected Contents & Structure of Equipment Installation Manual
1.
Installation
procedure
Description of activities of installation gangs: Preparation &

Setting up, Precautions for preventing damage etc shall be
highlighted.
2.
Safety Instructions
Instructions & procedures related to ensuring installation crew

safety: personnel grounding & safety, installation equipment
safety, Safety for power system & environment
3.
Description of
Installation
Equipment
Sketches, drawings, photographs, safe working ratings of

installation equipment, tools & tackles etc., handling
instructions & precautions.
4.
Cable routing
Illustrations of the various possible cable routing (Intra

cabinet and inter cabinet, within the same room and located in
different rooms/buildings etc.) methods.
5.
References
References to other related documents covering the

installation, jointing & testing, such as
SAT administrative & functional test plans & test
procedures
Field Quality Plan & Field Quality Audit
Storage & Handling Instructions
Drawings, technical parameters, DRS etc
Employer & Statutory safety rules, safety manuals,
standards, codes of practices etc.
Section-8
Page 12 of 13

Table 8-2b: Expected Contents & Structure of FO Cable Installation Manual for
Overhead FO cable
1.
Installation
procedure
Description of activities of installation gangs: Preparation &

Setting up, Stringing, sagging, attaching hardware, attaching
down lead clamps & cable routing on the tower, securing
cable ends (for protection before work by jointing gang).
Precautions for preventing cable damage shall be highlighted.
2.
Safety Instructions
Instructions & procedures related to ensuring installation crew

safety: personnel grounding & safety, installation equipment
safety, Safety for power system & environment (viz
preventing accidental tripping, precaution for railway
crossings etc)
3.
Description of
Installation
Equipment
Sketches, drawings, photographs, safe working ratings of

installation equipment, tools & tackles etc., handling
instructions & precautions.
4.
Cable routing
Illustrations of the positions of tower attachment clamps

(down lead clamps), routing of FO cable on the tower, service
loop(s), joint box position.
5.
References
References to other related documents covering the

installation, jointing & testing, such as
SAT administrative & functional test plans & test
procedures
Jointing Procedures
Field Quality Plan & Field Quality Audit
Storage & Handling Instructions
FO cable & hardware drawings, technical parameters, DRS
etc
Employer & Statutory safety rules, safety manuals,
standards, codes of practices etc.
-----------------------------------End of this Section-------------------------------------
Section-8
Page 13 of 13

Section 09
Project Management, Schedule and Implementation Plan
Index
9.1
Project Management ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
9.1.1
Reporting Period ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
9.1.2
Progress Meetings -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
9.1.3
Transmittals---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
9.1.4 Quality Assurance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

9.1.4.1 General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
9.1.4.2 Quality Assurance System and Requirements---------------------------------------------- 3
9.1.4.3 Variance Reporting and Processing --------------------------------------------------------- 4
9.1.4.4 Additional Quality Assurance Requirements----------------------------------------------- 6
9.1.5
Software Configuration Management---------------------------------------------------------- 6
9.1.6
Document Review and Approval Rights ------------------------------------------------------ 7
9.2
Project Schedule --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
9.2.1 Implementation Schedule ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7

9.2.1.1 Contractor Activities --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
9.2.1.2 The Employer Activities ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
9.2.2
Documentation Schedule ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
9.2.3
Training Schedule ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
9.3
Progress Reporting------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10
9.3.1
Monthly Progress Reports ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
9.3.2
Quarterly Progress Review Meetings --------------------------------------------------------- 11
9.4
Implementation Plan --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
9.4.1
Implementation Steps --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
9.4.2
Implementation phases -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
9.5
Implementation Schedule ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
Section-9
Page 1 of 14

Section -09
Project Management, Schedule and Implementation Plan
This section describes the project management, schedule, quality assurance, and implementation plan
requirements for the project.
9.1
Project Management
The Contractor shall assign a project manager with the authority to make commitments and decisions
that are binding on the Contractor. The project manager's responsibility shall include interface and
coordination with the Project contractor(s). The Employer will designate a project manager to
coordinate all the Employer project activities. All Project correspondence and communications
between the Employer and the Contractor shall be coordinated through the project managers.
The project shall be staffed from the list of project management and engineering personnel presented
in the proposal. Principal participants shall have previous experience in a similar position on at least
two other projects of similar scope to this project. The assignment and reassignment of the
Contractor's principal participants in the project shall be subject to the Employer's approval.
9.1.1 Reporting Period
The Project Manager shall provide updated project schedules and complete progress reports on
monthly basis for the duration of the project. All references to the reporting period throughout this
Specification shall refer to this monthly period.
9.1.2 Progress Meetings
The Project Manager shall schedule and attend Progress Meetings as deemed necessary but no less
than once every two months.
9.1.3 Transmittals
Every document, letter, progress report, change order, and any other written or electronic media
transmissions exchanged between Contractors and the Employer shall be assigned a unique
transmittal number. Discussions and phone calls where project related information is exchanged shall
be documented in a transmittal. The Contractor shall maintain a correspondence index and assign
transmittal numbers consecutively for all Contractor documents. The Employer will maintain a
similar correspondence numbering scheme identifying documents and correspondence that the
Employer initiates.
Section-9
Page 2 of 14

9.1.4 Quality Assurance

9.1.4.1 General
The Contractor shall adhere to a Quality Assurance (QA) program for the preparation of all Contract
deliverables, including documentation, hardware, firmware and software. The program shall provide
for early detection of actual or potential deficiencies, timely and effective corrective action, and a
method of traceability of all such deficiencies.
The Bidder's proposal shall include the relevant ISO 9000 certificates from the main Bidder and from
all subcontractors which have a major part (over 10%) of the delivery.
The relevant ISO 9000 standards to be provided are the following:
-
ISO 9001: model for quality assurance in design, development, production,

installation and servicing
ISO 9002: model for quality assurance in production and installation
ISO 9003: model for quality assurance in final inspection and testing
The Quality Assurance procedures, documentation standards, and software development procedures
which were included with the Bidders proposal will be incorporated into the Contract.
9.1.4.2 Quality Assurance System and Requirements
The ISO 9001 Certificate and the assessment and visit reports shall be available to the Employer
throughout the duration of the contract.
The Quality Assurance program shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall be finally accepted by
the Employer after discussions before the award of contract. A Quality Assurance program of the
Contractor shall generally cover but not limited to the following:
a.
Organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality
assurance program.
b.
Documentation control system.
c.
Qualification data for Contractors key personnel
d.
The procedure for purchases of materials, parts/components and selection of sub-
Section-9
Page 3 of 14

Contractors services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw

material inspection, verification of material purchases etc.
e.
System for shop manufacturing including process controls and fabrication and assembly
controls.
f.
Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective action.
g.
Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing equipments.
h.
Inspection and test procedure for manufacture.
i.
System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.
j.
System for quality audits
k.
System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Employer.
l.
System for maintenance for records.
m. System for handling storage and delivery

n.
A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopted for
controlling the quality characteristics of the product.
The Quality Assurance Plan shall be mutually discussed and approved by the Employer after
incorporating necessary corrections by the Contractor as may be required.
This Quality Assurance plan shall then form part of the contractual documentation and shall not
be changed without prior agreement with the Employer. The Contractor shall be required to
submit all the Quality Assurance Documents as stipulated in the Quality Assurance Plan at the
time of the Employers inspection of equipment/material.
The Employer or his duly authorised representatives reserve the right to carry out Quality Audit
and Quality Surveillance of the systems and procedures of the Contractor/his vendors Quality
Management and Control Activities.
9.1.4.3 Variance Reporting and Processing
An automated variance recording and tracking system shall be placed in service at least one
month before the initially scheduled beginning of the FAT. This system shall be designed to
record and track variances for documentation deficiencies, functional deficiencies, performance
deficiencies, procedural deficiencies (as when deviations from contractually required QA
Section-9
Page 4 of 14

procedures are observed), and test deficiencies (as when the System cannot satisfactorily pass a
step within a test procedure).
Variances may be initiated by both Contractor and the Employer personnel and shall be classified
as follows:
a.
Open (recorded but not necessarily agreed to)
b.
Assigned (denoting acceptance by the Contractor)
c.
Pending (denoting fixed, in the Contractors opinion, and awaiting retest or

verification)
d.
Resolved (denoting the Employer acceptance or verification).
For the tracking of the variances and to support the automatic printout of subset lists, the
following information fields shall be stored for each variance:
e.
Variance number (automatically assigned)
f.
Date initially recorded
g.
Status (open/assigned/pending/resolved)
h.
Date current status recorded
i.
Names of the involved Employer personnel
j.
Names of assigned Contractor personnel
k.
Subsystem involved
l.
Test name (where applicable)
m.
Description (up to five lines in a full printout and part of the first line in a one-lineper-variance printout)
n.
Urgency description (1, 2, or 3).
The variance recording and tracking system shall allow full printouts of all of the above
information, condensed printouts of abbreviations of the above information (one-line-pervariance) and shall produce subsets of the variances based on searches of the fields singly or in
combinations. For example, it shall be possible to produce a printout of all the variances (and
Section-9
Page 5 of 14

only those variances) that were at level 1 of 2 urgency, concerning a specific named subsystem,
had open or assigned status, and were initiated within a named period.
Depending on its impact, each variance shall be assigned to one of three urgency levels by the
Contractor with the Employer having level assignment approval rights.
level 1
Testing will stop for immediate evaluation and correction by the Contractor
level 2
Testing will continue and the variance will be corrected at the end of the
current session or day
level 3
Testing will continue and the variance will be corrected and tested at a
mutually agreed upon time (e.g., at the end of the test or later in the test
period prior to shipment).
A variance status summary shall be included in the monthly project progress reports, and up-todate variance reports shall be made available to the Employer on demand.
The variance recording and tracking system shall be subject to approval by the Employer.
9.1.4.4 Additional Quality Assurance Requirements
The Employer shall have access to the Contractors premises at any mutually agreed time and be
provided access to inspect and assess the quality system should any specific need arise. The
Employer shall also be able to conduct on site reviews as mutually agreed.
The Employer shall have access to any relevant documentation for verification that quality
procedures are in accordance with the contract-specific quality plan.
9.1.5
Software Configuration Management
All software development performed by the Contractor shall be under a formal, documented
software configuration management procedure. The procedure shall encompass the following
aspects:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Inventory control
Version control
Change control
Build management.
The software configuration management scheme shall be managed by a designated software

administrator(s). In case, the software is already a developed product, software configuration
management shall begin at the time software is initially installed on the system. In case of new or
Section-9
Page 6 of 14

continuing development, software configuration management shall be immediately initiated

during the earliest phases of development. The administrator(s) shall work closely with the
Contractor software staff and shall be responsible for enforcing the software management
procedures.
9.1.6
Document Review and Approval Rights
To ensure that the proposed systems conform to the specific provisions and general intent of the
Specification, the Contractor shall submit documentation describing the systems to the Employer
for review and approval.
The Employer will respond with written comments to the Contractor within thirty (30) calendar
days after receipt of the documents. Documents requiring correction must be resubmitted by the
Contractor to the Employer within 30 calendar days. The Employer will respond to resubmitted
documents within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of the document. No implementation
schedule relief is to be implied for documents requiring correction and resubmission to the
Employer.
The Employer shall have the right to require the Contractor to make any necessary
documentation changes at no additional cost to the Employer to achieve conformance with the
Specification.
Any purchasing, manufacturing, or programming implementation initiated prior to written the
Employer approval of the relevant documents or drawings shall be performed at the Contractor
risk. Review and approval by the Employer shall not relieve the Contractor of its overall
responsibilities to satisfy system functions and performance requirements in accordance with the
Specification.
To help the Employer manage the review and approval of documents during any given period,
the Contractor shall stagger the release of documents over the time allocated in the project
schedule. The number and size of documents shall be factored into the document release
schedule. At any time, no more than five documents shall be submitted to the Employer for
review and approval.
9.2
Project Schedule
The project schedule shall consist of an implementation schedule, a documentation schedule, and
a training schedule.
9.2.1
Implementation Schedule
The Contractor shall produce and maintain the implementation schedule. A copy of the
implementation schedule files on a CD-ROM shall also be provided to the Employer. The overall
Section-9
Page 7 of 14

project plan shall consist of a Milestone Plan and a detailed Schedule Plan.
The Contractor shall provide a critical path analysis report and a manpower resource analysis
report. Other standard reports will be defined during the Work statement.
Within two weeks of contract signing, the Contractor shall submit detailed project schedule, as
described below. The project schedule shall include all tasks to track overall direction and
integration of the project from inception through completion.
The Schedule Plan shall be developed utilizing the concept of Work Breakdown Structures. No
task shall be greater than 3 weeks in duration.
The implementation schedule shall include the project milestones defined in Volume I, the
Contractor activities and the Employer activities defined in this Section. The project schedule
shall be an accurate representation of the progress and planned activities of the project.
The actual progress made to date and the scheduled delivery date for the completed systems shall
be closely monitored by both the Contractor and the Employer project managers. The following
information shall be reported to the Employer in a clear and concise manner using the tabular and
graphic capabilities of the project management software:
(a)
An overview and general assessment of all the Employer and Contractor activities
and any progress or delays in these activities since the last reporting period
(b)
Identification of tasks in the critical path together with an analysis indicating any
required remedial action
(c)
The amount of contingency time (float) remaining in the schedule
(d)
Information on each task, including:

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Estimated start and finish dates

Any change in the estimated dates since the last reporting period
Estimated total number of calendar-days to complete the task
Percent of task completed
An indication of whether the start date was manually entered or computed.
(e)
Total project resources
(f)
(g)
The tasks to begin in the next two reporting periods

The tasks to be completed in the next two reporting periods
(h)
The tasks completed in the last two reporting periods
Section-9
Page 8 of 14

The content and format of the project schedule shall be subject to the Employer approval. The
Contractor shall update and submit the project schedule to the Employer at least one week prior
to each progress meeting.
9.2.1.1 Contractor Activities
The implementation schedule shall be compiled by the Contractor summarizing all activities, and
shall include but not be limited to the following:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Survey, Design & Engineering

Hardware purchases, development, and integration
Hardware production schedules
Documentation preparation and release
Documentation revision and release following the Employer review
Software design, coding, unit testing, and integration
System integration
Type Tests and Factory testing
Shipment
Receipt, forwarding and staging
Installation
Site Acceptance testing
Each scheduled task shall have an estimated duration for completion and predefined relationships
with other tasks. Relationships shall be used to enforce the logical progression of work in as
much as certain tasks cannot start until others have been completed.
9.2.1.2 The Employer Activities
The implementation schedule shall contain all the Employer activities required in order for the
Contractor to complete their systems and integration tasks, including the following:
(a)
(b)
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.2.2
Document reviews and approvals

Licensing and Regulatory Clearances, if any
Participation in all levels of testing and training
Any site preparations, if required.
Assistance NMS database, display and report definition
Documentation Schedule
The documentation schedule shall include an entry for each document and drawing to be
delivered throughout the project. Each documentation schedule entry shall include the document
or drawing title, number, revision level, actual or future submittal date for the Employer review
Section-9
Page 9 of 14

or approval, date of completion of review or approval by the Employer, and outcome of review
or approval by the Employer. When the Employer requires correction to any document, the
documentation schedule shall be updated with a new entry for the next revision of the document.
The content and format of the documentation schedule shall be subject to the Employer approval.
The documentation schedule shall allow for at least two submissions of each document requiring
review or approval. The time schedule for document review or approval by the Employer shall
be as specified in this section.
9.2.3 Training Schedule
The training schedule shall identify the dates of all of the training courses. The Contractor shall
work with the Employer to determine the training schedule. The training schedule shall be
subject to the Employer approval.
The appendices provide training requirement for this package. The training schedule shall
accommodate the Constituent's availability of personnel in so much as it is possible.
9.3
Progress Reporting
With the intent to assure quality management and project progress as per the implementation
schedule, progress reports submitted for each reporting period and Progress Review Meetings
shall focus on the following:
9.3.1 Monthly Progress Reports
A Monthly Progress Report shall be prepared by the Project Manager that includes inputs from
all its subsystem. The report shall be made available to the Employer as hard copy and soft copy,
by the10th working day of each month and shall include but not be limited to:
(a)
Updated project schedule highlighting any deviations from the previous issue
of the project schedule
(b)
Explanation and anticipated effect of each schedule deviation and its

implication to the Employer.
(c)
Schedule recovery plan for any deviation incurring a delay in delivery date.
(All delays shall be factored into the project schedule as soon as they are
known to the Contractor.)
(d)
A summary of activities performed by the Contractor and the Employer

during the previous reporting period
Section-9
Page 10 of 14

An updated list of all correspondence transmitted and received by the

Contractor
(f)
Updated documentation schedule
(g)
Updated training schedule
(h)
List of all Contractor personnel and the Employer personnel resident at the
Contractor facility, identifying all activities performed by each person and the
activities scheduled for the next two reporting periods
(i)
Updated list of Contractor and the Employer action items with status,
description of required information, and required resolution dates
(j)
Summary of pending and upcoming Contractor and the Employer activities

during the next two reporting periods along with required completion dates
(k)
Status of unresolved contract questions and change requests
(l)
Summary of variances
(m)
(n)
Log of invoice status

Description of current and anticipated project problems and steps to be taken
to resolve each problem.
9.3.2
(e)
Quarterly Progress Review Meetings
Progress Review Meetings shall be scheduled by the project managers and attended by the
Contractor and the Employer to review progress of the project. Progress meetings shall be used
to review the progress reports for the previous reporting periods, written correspondence
exchanged since the last meeting, and open action items.
The Contractor shall also attend technical meetings as required to discuss technical aspects of the
project and to review the Employer comments on approval documents. When appropriate, these
splinter meetings shall be conducted as extensions to the progress meetings.
At least one-half of all meetings shall be held at the Employer's offices. Record the minutes of
each meeting shall be prepared and provided as hard copies to all attendees on the same day
whenever possible, but not later than within two working days after the meeting. Table 9-1
provides a suggested agenda for Progress Review Meetings.
Section-9
Page 11 of 14

Table 9-1:
Suggested Progress Review Meeting Agenda
Item:
9.4
Title:
Description:
1.
Meeting Minutes:
Review minutes from previous meeting, with comments
2.
Open Action Items:
Review all outstanding action items
3.
Progress Review:
Review with participating Project Managers and

Contractor, most recent project schedule. Update
schedule and develop Action Items.
4.
Technical
Discussion:
Discuss Technical Issues.
5.
Action Items:
Assign responsibilities for new action items.
6.
Administrative
Matters:
Discuss administrative matters
7.
Action Items:
Assign responsibilities for action items.
8.
Next Meeting:
Schedule time and place for next meeting and agree on

agenda
9.
Adjourn:
Adjourn meeting.
Implementation Plan
The implementation of integrated wideband telecommunication system network with

procurement under multiple Contracts and involvement of multiple agencies, requires careful
planning and co-ordination. Consequently, this section describes the Employer's phased
implementation strategy for the Communication Equipment Package of the project that is
consistent with implementation plans of other package(s). The Bidders shall propose preliminary
implementation plans that will follow the above approach. The Employer and the Contractor
shall finalise the detailed implementation plan following the award of the contract.
Section-9
Page 12 of 14

9.4.1
Implementation Steps
The basic implementation steps pertaining to telecommunication system of the project are:
(a)
Design & parameterize the integrated wideband network, including

implementation strategies.
(b)
Conduct site & route surveys, identify equipment locations and required site
preparations.
(c)
Subsystems design, manufacture, factory & type test (if applicable).
(d)
Shipping, installation and field testing for above.
(e)
Design, manufacture, factory and type test (if applicable) of termination equipment
and NMS subsystems and other related equipment.
(f)
Shipping, installation and field testing of above.
(g)
Integration of FOTS, associated equipment, inside plant, PABX & PLC and
integration with existing network.
(h)
Field testing of the integrated telecommunication network including the NMS

subsystem.
(i)
Acceptance test and cutover support of the Project requirements of the integrated
telecommunications network
Though not detailed, the above steps are intended to encompass all relevant work required to
provide the Employer a fully working integrated telecommunication network supporting all
Project commitments.
9.4.2
Implementation phases
The above implementation steps shall be organised and managed in various overlapping phases
9.5
Implementation Schedule
The implementation schedule for the Communication System Package shall be fifteen (15)
months from the date of award. The fibre optic links which are essentially required for
replacement of microwave shall be implemented on priority basis. These links shall be identified
Section-9
Page 13 of 14

during L-2 Schedule finalisation.

Appendix to this Technical Specifications provides a implementation schedule guidelines
consistent with the phased implementation plan described herein and the Implementation
Schedule for the Communication System Package.
-----------------------------------End of this Section-------------------------------------
Section-9
Page 14 of 14

APPENDIX - A
General Network /Link Details and Implementation Schedule
Appendix-A
Page 1 of 11

Typical tower drawings
Appendix-A
Page 2 of 11

Appendix-A
Page 3 of 11

Appendix-A
Page 4 of 11

Table A-1
Typical transmission line details
Line
Voltage
S/C or
D/C
Nominal Span (E/W

& Conductors in
mtrs.)
Wind Zone
as per
IS 802
Design Tension at Every

Day Temp (32 C) and
full wind condition
Earthwire) in kg for
Wind Zone
Wind
Pressure
(kg/Sq-m)
considering
gust factor
Max Sag Ground

Wire at 53C
(in mtrs)
UTS
Earthwire
(in Kg)
Weight Earth
wire
(in Kg/km)
Minimum Clearance in mtrs.

A1
B1
C1
S/C
400
IV
3180.20
188.76
10.165
6974
0.583
8.84
8.0
9.0
D/C
400
IV
3345.86
198.83
10.199
6972
0.583
8.84
8.0
9.0
D/C
350
IV
2543.88
192.00
7.684
5708
0.428
7.015
4.9
8.5
S/C
350
2758.53
217.44
7.86
5708
0.428
7.015
4.9
8.5
S/C
320
III
2508.93
167.72
5.13
5708
0.428
6.1
3.9
6.1
S/C
300
2806.86
212.474
4.504
5708
0.428
6.1
3.9
6.1
S/C
320
VI
3255.30
262.31
5.13
5708
0.428
6.1
3.9
6.1
400KV
220 kV
132 kV
A1
B1
C1
Minimum clearance between conductor and ground (in meters)

Minimum clearance between two phase conductors (in meters) vertical in case of D/C towers and horizontal in case of S/C towers.
Minimum clearance between conductor and earth wire (in meters)
State wise Wind Zones (As per IS 875-Part-3):

1. Arunachal Pradesh: III(Major Portion), IV
2. Assam: IV, V, VI
3. Mizoram: VI
400KV- IV Zone,
220KV- IV & V Zone
132KV III, V & VI Zone
Appendix-A
Page 5 of 11

Fig A-1: Implementation Schedule for Communication System package
Appendix-A
Page 6 of 11

Table A-2
Proposed Fibre Optic Links
S. No.
Proposed Fibre Optic Links
Constituents
From
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Central Sector
Badarpur (PG)
Gohpur
Mariani
Namsai (PG)
Itanagar (PG)
Badarpur (PG)
Kolasib
To
Silchar (PG)
Itanagar (PG)
Mariani (PG)
Tinsukia
Itanagar (SLDC)
Kolasib
Aizawl(PG)
Line
details
Propose
d FO
cable
(in kms)
kV
OPGW
132*
132
132*
132*
132*
132
132
37
45
10
100
32
108
66
398
67
Sub-Total
220
1.
BTPS
Agia
2.
Agia
Sarusujai
220
131
3.
Namrup
Tinsukia
132
49
4.
Balipara
Gohpur
132
75
Badarpur (PG)
Badarpur (AEGCL)
Jiribam
Pailapool
132*
132
15
7.
Pailapool
Srikona
132*
45
8.
Badarpur (AEGCL)
Srikona
5.
AEGCL
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Other Region
(NR)
Maradnagar(400)
Shamli(220)
Panki(400)
Verpal
Mohali(132)
Pong
Kongo
Gangwal
132*
Sub-Total
220
Shamli(220)
220
Saharanpur(220)
220
Fatehpur
220
Raisheena
220
Mohali(220)
220
Daswa
220
Dehar
220
Bhakra
Sub-Total
Grand Total
15
401
85
71
94
22
9
40
3
22
346
1145
* Proposed(Future) Lines
Appendix-A
Page 7 of 11

Table A-3: Site wise break up of

Communication Equipments
S.N
o
Location
SDH
Eqpt
(upto
2
directi
on)
Optical cards for SDH Eq.(for more then

2 Dir)
Optical cards for SDH Eq.(up to 2 Dir)
S1.
1
S4.
1
L4.
1
L4.
2
OLI
(upto
150km
)
OLI
(151175k
m)
SDH
Eqpt
(> 2
dir.)
S1.
1
S4.
1
L4.
1
L4.
2
OLI
(upto
150k
m)
OLI
(151175k
m)
D&I
Mux
2
wire
(sub/s
ub)
4
wire
(E&
M)
Async
hrono
us
DACS
Cabi
nets
(SDH
)
Cabinets
(MUX/DA
CS)
Central
Sector
1
Bongaigaon#
BTPS
Aizawl(PG)
Silchar(PG)
Ghopur#
Itanagar(SLD
C)*
Namsai
Tinsukia
Kolasib
Mariani(PG)
10
11
Itanagar(PG)
12
Mariani(AEG
CL)#*
11
10
10
20
20
20
20
13
12
13
Badarpur(PG)
Sub Total
(CS)
Appendix-A
Page 8 of 11

Table A-4 (contd.) Site wise break up of

Communication Equipments
S.
No
Location
SDH
Eqpt
(upto
2
directi
on)
Optical cards for SDH Eq.(for more then 2

Dir)
Optical cards for SDH Eq.(up to 2 Dir)
S1.1
S4.1
L4.1
L4.
2
OLI
(upt
o
150
km)
OLI
(151175k
m)
SDH
Eqpt
(> 2
dir.)
S1.1
S4.1
L4.1
L
4.
2
OLI
(upto
150k
m)
OLI
(151175k
m)
D&I
Mux
2
wire
(sub/
sub)
4
wire
(E&
M)
Asy
nch
ron
ous
DACS
Cabi
nets
(SD
H)
Cabinet
s
(MUX/D
ACS)
AEGCL
1
Agia
Sarusajai#
Balipara
Badarpur
(AEGCL)
Srikona
Pailapool
Jiribam
Misa
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Samaguri
0
0
10
Lakwa#
11
Namrup#
Sub Total
Grand
Total
11
10
12
16
16
16
16
11
22
16
18
22
10
36
36
36
36
24
20
Note*: SDH Equipment considered in Central Sector

Note#: Existing Microwave Locations
Appendix-A
Page 9 of 11

FIG-A2
Proposed OPGW Network For North Eastern Region
Fibre Optic Details
ARUNACHAL PRADESH
Central Sector
= 398
AEGCL Portion
= 401
OPGW in other Project = 346
Total Fibre Optic Length = 1145
NAMSAI
32
TINSUKIA
49
ITANAGAR
PG
BHUTAN
100
ITANAGAR
(SLDC)
MARIYANI
PG
45
LAKWA
59
NAMRUP
10
GOHPUR
75
BALIPARA
MARIANI
SAMAGURI
5
35
BONGAIGAON
131
BTPS
MISA
KAHELIPARA SLDC
67
DIMAPUR
AGIA
SARUSAJAI
ASSAM
UMIAM-III
NAGALAND
KOHIMA
MYANMAR
NEHU, SLDC
UMIAM -I
KHANDONG
RDCC, SHILLONG
KHLIEHRIAT
MEGHALAYA
KOPILI
SILCHAR
(PG)
37
JIRIBAM
BADARPUR
(PG)
BADARPUR
(AEGCL)
BANGLADESH
MANIPUR
IMPHAL (PG)
15
PAILAPOOL
SRIKONA
KOLASIB
KUMARGHAT
AGBPP
AGARTALA
LEGEND
AIZAWL(PG)
MIZORAM
TRIPURA
Appendix-A
Central Sector Sub-Station

Existing OPGW Links
Proposed OPGW Cable to be done
by POWERGRID for AEGCL.
Proposed Central Sector OPGW Link
OPGW in other Projects
Existing SLDC
SEB Sub-Station
Existing RSCC
Page 10 of 11

Fig: A-3
EXISTING FO NETWORK OF NER
Tinsukia
Telecommunication Network for NERSCC System
Dhaligaon
Barnagar
Itanagar
Rangia
Teok
Chandrapur
Pathsala
Gossaingaon
Agia
Bongaigaon
(PG)
Namrup
Dibrugarh
Ranganadi
Balipara
Dergaon
Mokakchung
Mariani
Kathalguri
Samaguri
Umtru
Lakwa
Gohpur
Tezpur
Misa
Kahelipara
Sarusajai
B. Charali
Bokajan
Kopili
Doyang
Umium IV
Umium III
Bongaigaon
Thermal
Umium II
Umium I
RSCC
Shillong
Dimapur
(PG)
Khandong
Kakching
Khleihriat(PG)
Khleihriat
Dullavchera
Imphal
(PG)
Haflong
Nehu
Mowlai
Karong
Dimapur
Kohima
Pailapool
Baderpur(PG)
NinthouKhong
Loktak
Kolasib
Badarpur
Yangangpokpi
Imphal
Jiribam
LEGEND
RSCC
Purba Kanchanbari
Kumarghat
Aizwal
Dharmanagar
SLDC (despatch Centre)

SLDC (Display Centre)
Aizwal(PG)
RTU (CS)
Baramura
Agartala Gas
RTU (state)
FO link
Agartala
Rakhia
Appendix-A
Badharghat
Udaipur
Microwave Link
PLCC
Cable
Repeater
Gumti
Page 11 of 11

APPENDIX B:
BILL OF QUANTITIES
Appendix-B
Page 1 of 14

Unit
Other
Region
(NR)
TOTAL
QTY
Item Description
AEGCL
Sr.No.
CS
Table -1
BOQ for Overhead Optical Fibre Cabling
Km.
398
401
346
1145
398
401
346
1145
No.
133
134
115
382
OPGW cable & Accessories
24 Fibre (DWSM) OPGW fibre optic cable
Installation Hardware set for 24 Fibre OPGW

Fibre Optic cabling including all cable fittings &
accessories except joint box
Joint box (24 Fibre)
Supervision of stringing of OPGW during

installation on new transmission line
Man
days
30
30
5a
Installation of OPGW (Live Line)
Km
219
337
346
902
5b
Installation of OPGW(Off-line)
Km
79
64
143
FODP
FODP 48F : Indoor Type, rack mounted with

FCPC coupling and pig tails
No.
22
FODP 96 F : Indoor Type, rack mounted with

FCPC coupling and pig tails
No.
Fibre Optic approach cable
Appendix-B
Set/km
Page 2 of 14
Item Description
Unit
CS
AEGCL
Other
Region
(NR)
TOTAL
QTY

24 Fibre (DWSM)
Km.
21
Installation hardware set for above 24Fibre,

Fibre Optic Approach Cable
21
Survey of Transmission line for OPGW
398
401
799
Sr.No.
Set/km
Km.
Note: *One set of installation hardware shall contain all installation hardware fittings as may be required
for 1 km of OPGW & Approach Fibre optic Cable.
Appendix-B
Page 3 of 14

(I)
(II)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(III)
(a)
(b)
B
(I)
Transmission Equipment
SDH Equipment- STM 4 (ADM up to two
directions)
Base Equipment (Common cards, Crossconnect/control cards, Optical base card,
Power supply cards, power cabling, other
hardware & accessories including sub-racks,
patch cords, DDF etc. fully equipped excluding
(II) and (III) below)
Optical Interfaces/SFP for:
S1.1
S4.1
L4.1
L4.2
to support upto 150 kms for STM-4*
to support from 151 km to 175 km for STM-4*
Tributary Cards
E1 Interface card (Minimum 16 interfaces per
card )
Ethernet interfaces 10/100 Mbps with Layer-2
switching
(Minimum 4 interfaces per card.)
SDH Equipment STM 4(ADM more than
two directions)
Base Equipment (Common cards, Crossconnect/control cards, Optical base cards,
(II)
(a)
(b )
S1.1
S4.1
Appendix-B
Unit
TOTAL
QTY
1.0
A
Item Description
AEGCL
S.N
O.
CS
Table - 2
BOQ for Telecom Equipment
No.
11
11
22
No.#
No.#
No.#
No.#
No.#
0
6
6
10
6
16
10
18
10
12
22
10
No.#
22
22
44
11
11
22
No.
No.
Set**
No.#
No.#
Page 4 of 14
CS
AEGCL
TOTAL
QTY

L4.2
No.#
No.#
(e)
No.#
(f)
No.#
20
16
36
20
16
36
20
16
36
20
16
36
12
08
20
13
11
24
S.N
O.
Item Description
(c)
(d)
L4.1
(III)
(a)
(b)
2.0
A1
A2
a)
b)
c)
B.
3.0
a)
b)
4.0
(i)
(a)
Unit
Tributary Cards
Set**
card )
Set**
switching (Minimum 4 interfaces per card.)
Termination Equipment
Drop & Insert Multiplexer
Base Equipment (Common cards, Power
supply cards, power cabling, other hardware &
No.
accessories including sub-racks, etc. fully
equipped excluding subscriber line interface
cards
Subscriber Line Interface Cards
2 wire (sub/sub) voice channel cards (min 8
No.
channels per card)
4 wire (E&M) voice channel cards (min 8
No.
channels per card)
Asynchronous Sub Channels data cards
No.
(V.24/V.28) , minimum 4 channels per card
Digital Access Cross Connect Switch
(DACS)
16 x 16 ports switching matrix, fully equipment
No.
for minimum 16 E-1 ports
Equipment Cabinets
No.
For Drop/Insert Multiplexer and DACS
For SDH Equipment (including DDF patching
No.
facilities) & other accessories
NMS
Craft Terminal
Hardware
Set
Appendix-B
Page 5 of 14
(ii)
(a)
(b)
(c)
5.0
6.0
7.0
Unit
TOTAL
QTY
(b)
Item Description
AEGCL
S.N
O.
CS

Software
Network Manager & Element Manager
System
Hardware
Software
Printer (Laser Jet)
Furniture for NMS hardware
Main Distribution Frame
(100 pairs)
Synchronization Equipment
GPS clock including all hardware &
accessories
Reconfiguration and Integration with existing
Telecom Equipment
Set
Set
Set
No.
Set
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
No.
26
22
48
Set
Lot
Note* : Suitable Optical Interface/SFP or any other solution such as optical amplifier, wavelength
translator or higher aggregate bit rate SDH equipment may be offered to meet the link budget
requirements without repeater.
Note**: set shall include quantity of SDH Base equipment with required hardware & accessories and
supporting tributary cards to meet the criteria (One SDH equipment supporting more than two
protected directions may be offered as per BoQ requirement)
Note# :Optical interface/SFP can be provided with Optical base card or Control card with the
condition that control card shall not be equipped with more than one Optical interface/SFP and optical
card with not more than two Optical interface/SFP. However main and protection channel shall be
terminated on separate cards.
Appendix-B
Page 6 of 14

Table-3: BOQ for Auxiliary Power Supply Equipments

Sl.
No.
Item Description
Unit
Quantity
CS
AEGCL
TOTAL
DCPS rating
15 A
Battery capacity
A.
1
Appendix-B
200 AH
25A
300AH
15 A
25A
15A
25A
200 AH
300AH
11
22
02
11
22
02
Main Equipments
SMPS based 48V DC
Power Supply (DCPS)
system
VRLA type Battery
bank for above DCPS
system
Nos.
11
Nos.
11
02
02
Page 7 of 14

OPGW cable & Accessories
24 Fibre (DWSM) OPGW fibre optic cable
Installation Hardware set for above OPGW Fibre Optic

cabling including all cable fittings & accessories
except joint box
Joint Box (24 fibre)
Fibre Optic approach cable
24 Fibre (DWSM)
Installation hardware set for above 24 Fibre,

Approach Fibre Optic Cable
Km.
18
18
No.
Km.
Set/km
Set/km
Note: *One set of installation hardware shall contain all installation hardware fittings as may be required
for 1 km of OPG W & Approach Fibre Optic cabling.
Appendix-B
Page 8 of 14
TOTAL QTY
Other
Region(NR)
AEGCL
Item Description
CS
S.No.
Unit
Table- 4
BOQ of Mandatory spares for Overhead Fibre Optic Cabling

1.0
A
(I)
(II)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(III)
(a)
(b)
B
(I)
(II)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Appendix-B
Item Description
Unit
Transmission Equipment
SDH Equipment- STM 4 (ADM up to two
directions)
Base Equipment (Common cards, Cross- Set$$
connect/control cards, Optical base cards,
S1.1
No.#
S4.1
No.#
L4.1
No.#
L4.2
No.#
No.#
No.#
Tributary Cards
No.
card )
No.
switching
(Minimum 4 interfaces per card.)
SDH Equipment STM 4(ADM more than
two directions)
Base Equipment (Common cards, Crossconnect/control cards, Optical base cards,
Set@
patch cords, DDF etc. fully equipped
excluding (II) and (III) below)
S1.1
No.@
S4.1
No.@
L4.1
No.@
L4.2
No.@
CS
TOTAL QTY
S.NO.
AEGCL
Table - 5
BOQ of Mandatory spares for Telecom Equipment
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Page 9 of 14
Item Description
(e)
Optical Line Interface card (to support up to

150 kms)**
Optical Line Interface card(to support from
176Km to 200 Km)**
Tributary Cards
card )
switching (Minimum 4 interfaces per card.)
Termination Equipment
DROP/Insert Multiplexer
Common cards, Power supply cards, power
cabling, other hardware & accessories (each)
Subscriber Line Interface Cards#
2 wire (sub/sub) voice channel cards (min 8
channels per card)
4 wire (E&M) voice channel cards (min 8
channels per card)
Asynchronous Sub Channels data cards
(V.24/V.28) , minimum 4 channels per card
Digital Access Cross Connect Switch
(DACS)
Common cards, Power supply cards, power
cabling, other hardware & accessories (each)
Pre Connectorized Optical Fiber Patch
Cords (10 Mtrs) Pack of six Patch cords
(f)
(III)
(a)
(b)
2.0
A1
A2
a)
c)
d)
C
Unit
No.@
CS
TOTAL QTY
S.NO.
AEGCL

Set$$
No.
No.
No.
Set$$
Set
No.@
No.@
No.@
Note*: Suitable Optical Interface/SFP or any other solution such as optical amplifier,
wavelength translator or higher aggregate bit rate SDH equipment may be offered to meet
the link budget requirements without repeater.
Note$$: One Set means one of each type of module/unit card etc
Note#: Include each type of optical base card which has been supplied under main
quantity meeting the criteria of 10% spare
Note@: Exclude those items/sub-items (module cards etc.) which are covered under
items1-B (SDH Equipment ADM upto two directions)
Appendix-B
Page 10 of 14

Table - 6
BOQ of Mandatory spares for Auxiliary Power Supply Equipments
Sl.
No.
1
2
3
Appendix-B
Quantity
Item Description
MCCB/MCB-2P/
Contactor/ Timer/
Relay of each type &
rating (as applicable)
Single Pole MCBs (for
outgoing DC Feeders)
Electronic
Printed
Circuit Board / Card
of each type (all
cards/module
including
SMPS
Module, DC Power
Supply
Controller,
various
interface
cards etc.)
Unit
CS
AEGCL
TOTAL
Set
01
01
Nos.
05
05
10
Set
01
01
02
02
Page 11 of 14

Fiber Optic Cabling

OTDR
(Optical
Time
Domain
Reflectometer) for 1310/1550 nm with
laser source
Optical
Attenuators
(variable
1310/1550nm)
Optical Power meter (1310/1550nm) with
Laser Source
Optical Talk set
Optical Fibre Fusion Splicer incl. Fibre
cleaver
Calibrated Fibre
Connectorization kit
Splice kit
Optical test accessory kit including all
necessary connectors, adaptors, cables,
terminations and other items required for
testing
Communication Equipment
SDH Analyser# with Jitter and Wander
Options
Handheld 2Mbps BER Tester
Digital Multimeter
Ethernet Tester (with dual port, 10/100 ports
Mbps Ethernet option, layer-1 & layer-2
functionality)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unit
TOTAL QTY
Test equipment
AEGCL
S.No.
Central
Sector
Table-7
BOQ for Test equipment
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
No.
0
0
1
1
1
1
No.
No.
No.
No.
Note: #The testing capacity of SDH analyser shall be provided according to offered SDH
equipment.
Appendix-B
Page 12 of 14

Table-8
Proposed Training Requirements
Central Sector
AEGCL
No. of trainees
1.
Training on Fibre Optic

Cabling system including
splicing of F.O. cable
during installation
India
2.
Training on SDH
equipment, Mux Equipment,
DACS & NMS
Manufacturer
works/
Training
centre
3.
Training on DCPS &

associated Battery
Manufacturer
works/Train
ing centre
S. No.
Appendix-B
Item Description
Location
Duration in
Working
days
Page 13 of 14

S. No.
Table -9
Maintenance for Communication System
Items Description
Unit
Qty
Maintenance for Communication System for one (1) year during

Year
Warranty period
Maintenance for Communication System (excl. FO cabling) for

Year
Six (6) years after Warranty period
1x6
Appendix-B
Page 14 of 14

Establishment of Fibre Optic Communication System in lieu of existing ULDC Microwave links in North Eastern
Region
APPENDIX-.C
Appendix-D- DRS
Page 1 of 5

Region
Appendix-C
The following sets of Data Requirement Sheets are required to be filled up by the
bidders to aid in the evaluation process. The response shall be brief and to the point
and shall be supported by the printed product description and other literature. The
same DRS format duly filled and the relevant drawings shall also be submitted during
the detailed engineering along with the relevant technical brochures.
DRS Form 1
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
OVERHEAD FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW):
Manufacturer:
_______________________________
Part #:
_______________________________
Configuration: _______________________________
Seq
Parameter:
AS per Technical
Specifications
1.
No. of Fibres
Dual Window Single-Mode:
2.
Buffer Type:
Loose Tube
3.
Buffer Tube material
Non-metallic
4.
No. of Buffer Tubes:
Minimum Two (2)
5.
No. of Fibres per buffer Tube:

Expected Cable Life:
6.
Appendix-D- DRS
As per Bidder Offering
24
Maximum Twelve(12)
25 Year
Page 2 of 5

Region
DRS Form 2
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for OPTICAL FIBRE
DUAL-WINDOW SINGLE MODE (DW-SM)
Seq
Parameter:
OPTICAL PARAMETERS
As per Technical
Specifications
1.
Fibre manufacturer(s)/Type:
2.
Attenuation Coefficient@ 1310 nm:

@ 1550 nm:
0.35 dB/km
0.21 dB/km
3.
Point discontinuity @ 1310nm:

@ 1550nm:
0.1 dB
0.1 dB
4.
Nominal Mode Field Diameter
5.
Coefficient
@ 1310 (1288-1339) nm:
@ 1310 (1271-1360) nm:
@ 1550 nm:
8.6 to 9.5 m ( 0.6

m )
3.5 ps/(nmxkm)
5.3 ps/(nmxkm)
18 ps/(nmxkm)
1300 to 1324 nm
6.
Zero dispersion wavelength:
7.
1260 nm
Cut off wavelength:
Physical and Mechanical Properties
8.
11.
Bend Performance:
(37.5 mm radius, 100 turns)
@1310 nm
(30 mm radius, 100 turn)
@1550 nm
(16mm radius, 1 turn) @
1550nm
Proof test level
Appendix-D- DRS
As per Bidder
offering
0.05 dB
0.05 dB
0.50 dB
0.69 Gpa
Page 3 of 5

Region
DRS Form 03
OPTICAL LINE TERMINATION EQUIPMENT (OLTE)
Manufacturer:_________________________________
Model #:
_________________________________
GENERAL OLTE FEATURES
Seq
Parameter:
SDH hierarchy level:
Capacity Aggregate Bit-rate:
CEPT E-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Ports:
Is the equipment upgradable to
STM-16 by changing optical line
cards only?
No. of minimum protected(MSP)
directions supported
No. of ports in E1 tributary cards
E1 ports
No. of ports in Ethernet interface
tributary cards
Service Channel provision
a) Voice Channel
b) Data Channel
As per Technical
Specifications
STM-4
622 Mbps
252 x E1
As per Bidder Offering
Yes
Two
minimum 16
minimum 4
Yes
Minimum 1
Minimum 1
7.
Power Supply & Converters card
of SDH equipment
1:1 APS or distributed

power supply
Common Control* Card of SDH

equipment
1:1 APS
* = Common Control Cards which are essentially required for the operation of the equipment
Appendix-D- DRS
Page 4 of 5

Region
DRS Form 04
Drop Insert MULTIPLEXERS
Manufacturer:
_________________________
Model #:
_____________________________
Configuration:
Seq.
Parameter
1.
Output Aggregate Rate
2.
3.
4.
5.
Interface Code
Impedance
Maximum Insertion Loss
Power Supply card of multiplexer
As per
Technical
Specification
2.048 Mbps
+/- 50 ppm
HDB3
75 ohm unbalanced
6 dB
1:1 APS or
distributed power
supply
As per Bidder
Offering
The detailed DRS for all equipment/items are required to be submitted along with brochures
during detailed engineering.
--------------------------------------------------End of the Appendix-----------------------------------
Appendix-D- DRS
Page 5 of 5

Opgw Tech

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Opgw Tech

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Opgw Tech

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Volume II - Technical Specifications for Communication System Package under

Bill of Quantity (BOQ)

Data Requirement Sheets

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Project Overview ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

Existing Communication System ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

Proposed Communication System -------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

Integration with Existing Communication Equipment --------------------------------------- 6

Details of Existing Equipment --------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

1.4.3 Synchronization of the Communication Network ----------------------------------------------- 6

General Technical Requirements (for Communication Equipment) ----------------------- 7

General Requirements --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

Systems to be supported --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

1.5.1 EMS/SCADA System

General Responsibilities and Obligations ----------------------------------------------------------- 8

Responsibilities for the Implementation Plan-------------------------------------------------- 9

Contractor Responsibilities and Obligations -------------------------------------------------- 9

The Employer Responsibilities and Obligations -------------------------------------------- 12

General Bidding Requirements ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

Table of Compliance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14

Organization of The Technical Specification Document --------------------------------------- 14

1.10 Applicable Standards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

1.1 Project Overview

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

1.2 Existing Communication System

Proposed Communication System

Scope & General Requirements

The scope of this package is described in following parts:

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

1.4.1 Communication Equipment Integration

All necessary interconnections and interfacing including supply and installation of

1.4.2 Details of Existing Equipment

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

1.4.4 General Technical Requirements (for Communication Equipment)

1.4.5 General Requirements

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

The following systems shall be supported by the proposed Communications Network.

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Responsibilities for the Implementation Plan

Contractor Responsibilities and Obligations

The Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of Communication System Package.

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

(39) Training of the Employer personnel.

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

General Bidding Requirements

Completed Data Requirement Sheets

Quality Assurance Program

Technical brochures/details of the offered

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.

- Bid complies with all requirements in the adjacent paragraph.

Organization of The Technical Specification Document

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.